Kinec Servo Drive

User Manual
Original Instructions
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives

Catalog Numbers 2198-H003-ERS, 2198-H008-ERS, 2198-H015-ERS, 2198-H025-ERS, 2198-H040-ERS, 2198-H070-ERS
2198-H003-ERS2, 2198-H008-ERS2, 2198-H015-ERS2, 2198-H025-ERS2, 2198-H040-ERS2, 2198-H070-ERS2,
2198-CAPMOD-1300
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to
familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws,
and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are
required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may
be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from
the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous
environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Table of Contents
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Preface
Conventions Used in This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Chapter 1
Start About the Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Drive Hardware and Input Power Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Standalone Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Shared AC/DC Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Shared DC Common-bus Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Shared AC/DC Hybrid Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Motor Feedback and Feedback-only Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Typical Communication Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Linear Topology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Ring Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Star Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Safe Torque-off Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Hardwired Safety Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Integrated Safety Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Catalog Number Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Agency Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Chapter 2
Plan the Kinetix 5500 Drive System Design Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
System Installation System Mounting Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Transformer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Circuit Breaker/Fuse Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Enclosure Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Minimum Clearance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Electrical Noise Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Bonding Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Bonding Multiple Subpanels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Establishing Noise Zones. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Cable Categories for Kinetix 5500 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Noise Reduction Guidelines for Drive Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 3

Table of Contents
Chapter 3
Mount the Kinetix 5500 Drive Determine Mounting Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
System Zero-stack Tab and Cutout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Shared-bus Connection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Single-axis Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Multi-axis Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Drill-hole Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Mount Your Kinetix 5500 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Chapter 4
Connector Data and Feature Kinetix 5500 Connector Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Descriptions Safe Torque-off Connector Pinout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Input Power Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DC Bus and Shunt Resistor Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Digital Inputs Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Ethernet Communication Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Motor Power, Brake, and Feedback Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . 63
Motor Feedback Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Understanding Control Signal Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Digital Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Ethernet Communication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Motor Brake Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Control Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Feedback Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Absolute Position Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Safe Torque-off Safety Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Servo Drives with Hardwired Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Servo Drives with Integrated Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Chapter 5
Connect the Kinetix 5500 Drive Basic Wiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
System Routing the Power and Signal Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Determine the Input Power Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Grounded Power Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Ungrounded Power Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Remove the Grounding Screws in Select Power Configurations . . . 76
Grounding the Drive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Ground the System Subpanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Ground Multiple Subpanels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Wiring Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Wiring Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Wiring the Power Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Wire the 24V Control Power Input Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Wire the Input Power Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Wiring the Digital Input Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Wire the Safe Torque-off Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

Table of Contents
Wire the Digital Inputs Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Wiring Kinetix VP Motors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Motor Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Motor Brake Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Motor Feedback Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Apply the Single Motor-cable Shield Clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Wiring Other Allen-Bradley Motors and Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Install the Kinetix 5500 Add-On Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Motor Power and Brake Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Motor Feedback Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Capacitor Module Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
External Passive-shunt Resistor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Ethernet Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Chapter 6
Configure and Start the Understanding the Kinetix 5500 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Kinetix 5500 Drive System Menu Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Setup Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Startup Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Configure the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Set the Network Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Studio 5000 Logix Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Kinetix 5500/5700 Add-On Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Install the Kinetix 5500/5700 Add-On Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Configure the Logix5000 Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Configure the Kinetix 5500 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Configure the Motion Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Configure Feedback-only Axis Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Configure Induction-motor Frequency-control Axis Properties . . 127
General and Motor Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Basic Volts/Hertz Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Sensorless Vector Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fan/Pump Volts/Hertz Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Configure PM Motor Closed-loop Control Axis Properties. . . . . . 136
Download the Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Apply Power to the Kinetix 5500 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Applying Power after Changing Input Voltage Range. . . . . . . . 140
Understanding Bus Sharing Group Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Bus Sharing Group Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Configure Bus-sharing Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Test and Tune the Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Test the Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Tune the Axes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Table of Contents
Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the Kinetix 5500 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Drive System Interpret Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Display Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
SAFE FLT Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Kinetix 5500 Drive Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . 160
General Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Logix5000 Controller and Drive Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Chapter 8
Remove and Replace Servo Drives Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Remove and Replace Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Remove Power and All Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Remove the Servo Drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Replace the Servo Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Start and Configure the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Chapter 9
Kinetix 5500 Safe Torque-off - Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Hardwired Safety Important Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Category 3 Requirements According to EN ISO 13849-1 . . . . 172
Stop Category Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Performance Level (PL) and Safety Integrity Level (SIL) . . . . . 172
Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Troubleshoot the Safe Torque-off Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Probability of Dangerous Failure Per Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Safe Torque-off Connector Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Wire the Safe Torque-off Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Safe Torque-off Wiring Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Safe Torque-off Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Safe Torque-off Feature Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Cascade the Safe Torque-off Signal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Safe Torque-off Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Chapter 10
Kinetix 5500 Safe Torque-off - Certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Integrated Safety Important Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Safety Application Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Category 3 Requirements According to ISO 13849. . . . . . . . . . 180
Stop Category Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Performance Level (PL) and Safety Integrity Level (SIL) . . . . . 181
Description of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
STO State Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Table of Contents
Troubleshoot the Safe Torque-off Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Probability of Dangerous Failure Per Hour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Safe Torque-off Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Out-of-Box State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Out-of-Box State Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Understanding Integrated Safety Drive Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Replacing an Integrated Safety Drive in a GuardLogix System . . . . 186
Replacement with Configure Only When No
Safety Signature Exists Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Replacement with Configure Always Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Motion Direct Commands in Motion Control Systems . . . . . . . . . 193
Understanding STO Bypass When Using Motion
Direct Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Logix Designer Application Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Torque Permitted in a Multi-workstation Environment . . . . . 196
Warning Icon and Text in Axis Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Functional Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Safe Torque-off Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams Interconnect Diagram Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Power Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Single-axis Drive Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Bus-sharing Wiring Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Shunt Resistor Wiring Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Kinetix 5500 Drive and Motor/Actuator Wiring Examples . . . . . . 207
System Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Appendix B
Upgrade the Drive Firmware Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Configure Logix5000 Controller Communication . . . . . . . . . . 217
Inhibit Feedback Only Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Upgrade Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Verify the Firmware Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Appendix C
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Shared-bus Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Configurations Shared AC Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Shared DC Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Shared AC/DC Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Shared AC/DC Hybrid Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Power Sharing Sizing Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Shared DC Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Shared AC/DC Hybrid Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Shared AC/DC Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Control Power Current Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Table of Contents
Kinetix 5500 System Current Demand Example . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Energy Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support Frequency Control Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Basic Volts/Hertz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Basic Volts/Hertz for Fan/Pump Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Sensorless Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Current Limiting for Frequency Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
The Effects of Current Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Enable the CurrentVectorLimit Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Set the CurrentVectorLimit Attribute Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Stability Control for Frequency Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Enable the Stability Control Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Skip Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Multiple Skip Speeds. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Flux Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Flux Up Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Configure the Flux Up Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Current Regulator Loop Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Motor Category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Motor Tests and Autotune Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Motor Analyzer Category Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Selection of Motor Thermal Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Generic Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Thermally Characterized Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Speed Limited Adjustable Torque (SLAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
SLAT Min Speed/Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
SLAT Max Speed/Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
SLAT Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Configure the Axis for SLAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Motor Overload Retention. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Torque Proving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Torque Proving Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Torque Proving Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Torque Proving Current Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Velocity Droop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Closed Loop Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Frequency Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Velocity Droop Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Velocity Droop Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Commutation Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Adaptive Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Table of Contents
Appendix E
EC Certifications EC Type - Examination Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
EU Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
European Union Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
CE Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Low Voltage Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Table of Contents
Notes:

Summary of Changes
This manual contains new and updated information as indicated in the

following table.
Topic Page
Updated Drive-to-Motor Maximum Cable Lengthtable with the 2090-CSBM1E1 cable. 30
Updated Transformer Selection with line reactor requirements. 33
Updated IEC (non-UL) Circuit Breaker/Fuse Selection table with DIN gG fuses. 33…35
Updated Kinetix® 5500/5700 Add-On Profile with changes for revision 5.001. 109
Updated the Revision field with firmware revision 5.001 and added step 4d. 116
Added Current Limiting for Frequency Control (new feature with drive firmware 5.001). 240
Added Stability Control for Frequency Control (new feature with drive firmware 5.001). 243
Revised the Motor Analyzer Category Troubleshooting content to increase understanding. 253
Added Commutation Test to Hookup Tests category (new feature with drive firmware 5.001). 269

Summary of Changes
Notes:

Preface
This manual provides detailed installation instructions for mounting, wiring,

and troubleshooting the Kinetix 5500 servo drives, and system integration for
your drive and motor/actuator combination with a Logix5000™ controller.
This manual is intended for engineers or technicians directly involved in the

installation and wiring of the Kinetix 5500 drives, and programmers directly
involved in the operation, field maintenance, and integration of these drives
with the EtherNet/IP™ communication module or controller.
If you do not have a basic understanding of Kinetix 5500 servo drives, contact
your local Rockwell Automation sales representative for information on
available training courses.
Conventions Used in This These conventions are used throughout this manual:
Manual • Bulleted lists such as this one provide information, not procedural steps.
• Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information.
• Catalog number string 2198-Hxxx-ERSx is used when there’s no need
to distinguish between -ERS or -ERS2 servo drives.
Kinetix 5500 Drive Cat. No. Description

2198-Hxxx-ERS Kinetix 5500 drive with hardwired safe torque-off functionality
2198-Hxxx-ERS2 Kinetix 5500 drive with integrated safe torque-off functionality
Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products
from Rockwell Automation.
Table 1 - Additional Resources

Resource Description
Product specifications for Kinetix VP (Bulletin VPL, VPF, and VPS), MP-Series™
Kinetix Rotary Motion Specifications Technical Data, publication GMC-TD001 (Bulletin MPL, MPM, MPF, and MPS), Kinetix 6000M (Bulletin MDF), TL-Series™,
RDD-Series™, and HPK-Series™ rotary motors.
Kinetix Linear Motion Specifications Technical Data, publication GMC-TD002 Product specifications for MP-Series (Bulletin MPAS ballscrew, MPAR, and MPAI)
and LDAT-Series linear actuators.
Product specifications for Kinetix Integrated Motion over the EtherNet/IP network,
Kinetix Servo Drives Specifications Technical Data, publication GMC-TD003 Integrated Motion over sercos interface, EtherNet/IP networking, and component
servo drive families.
Product specifications for Bulletin 2090 motor and interface cables, low-profile
Kinetix Motion Accessories Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD004 connector kits, drive power components, and other servo drive accessory items.
Kinetix 5000 AC Line Filter Installation Instructions, publication 2198-IN003 Information on installing AC line filters designed for Kinetix 5500 and Kinetix 5700
servo drive systems.
Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module Installation Instructions, publication 2198-IN004 Information on installing and wiring the Kinetix 5500 capacitor module.
Kinetix 5000 Shared-bus Connector Kit Installation Instructions, publication 2198-IN005 Information on installing shared-bus connector kits designed for Kinetix 5500 and
Kinetix 5700 servo drive systems.
Hiperface-to-DSL Feedback Converter Kit Installation Instructions, publication 2198-IN006 Information on installing the Hiperface-to-DSL feedback converter kit.
Shunt Resistor Installation Instructions, publication 2097-IN002 Information on installing and wiring Bulletin 2097 shunt resistors.

Preface
Table 1 - Additional Resources (continued)

Resource Description
System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, Information, examples, and techniques designed to minimize system failures
publication GMC-RM001 caused by electrical noise.
Overview of Kinetix servo drives, motors, actuators, and motion accessories
Kinetix Motion Control Selection Guide, publication KNX-SG001 designed to help make initial decisions for the motion control products best suited
for your system requirements.
System design guide to select the required (drive specific) drive module, power
Kinetix 5500 Drive Systems Design Guide, publication KNX-RM009 accessory, feedback connector kit, and motor cable catalog numbers for your
Kinetix 5500 drive and Kinetix VP motor motion control system.
Motion Analyzer application analysis software for drive/motor sizing.
Rockwell Automation® Configuration and Selection Tools
website http://www.rockwellautomation.com/en/e-tools Online product selection and system configuration tools, including AutoCAD (DXF)
drawings.
Rockwell Automation Product Certification, For declarations of conformity (DoC) currently available from
website http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification Rockwell Automation.
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Reference Manual, Information on the AXIS_CIP_DRIVE attributes and the configuration software
publication MOTION-RM003 control modes and methods.
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Configuration and Startup User Manual, Information on configuring and troubleshooting your ControlLogix® and
publication MOTION-UM003 CompactLogix™ EtherNet/IP network modules.
GuardLogix 5570 Controllers User Manual, publication 1756-UM022 Information on designing, installing, programming, or troubleshooting control
systems that use GuardLogix® 5570 controllers.
Information for development, operation, or maintenance of a GuardLogix 5570
GuardLogix 5570 Controller Systems Safety Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM099 controller-based safety system that uses the Studio 5000 Logix Designer®
application.
Safety Products Catalog website http://www.ab.com/catalogs Information regarding Allen-Bradley® safety products, including safety relays,
light curtain, and gate interlock applications.
ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade Kit User Manual, publication 1756-QS105 For ControlFLASH™ information not specific to any drive family.
National Electrical Code, published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston, MA An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment.
Rockwell Automation Industrial Automation Glossary, publication AG-7.1 A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations.
You can view or download publications at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page.
To order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.

Chapter 1
Start
Use this chapter to become familiar with the design and installation
requirements for Kinetix 5500 drive systems.
Topic Page
About the Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System 15
Drive Hardware and Input Power Configurations 17
Motor Feedback and Feedback-only Configurations 22
Typical Communication Configurations 23
Safe Torque-off Configurations 26
Catalog Number Explanation 29
Agency Compliance 30
About the Kinetix 5500 The Kinetix 5500 servo drives are designed to provide a Kinetix Integrated
Motion solution for your drive and motor/actuator application.
Servo Drive System
Table 2 - Kinetix 5500 Drive System Overview
Drive System Cat. No. Description
Component
200V-class (single-phase or three-phase) and 400V-class (three-phase) drives operate in standalone and multi-axis shared AC,
Kinetix 5500 2198-Hxxx-ERS shared DC, shared AC/DC, and shared AC/DC hybrid configurations. Modules are zero-stacked from drive-to-drive and use the
Servo Drives shared-bus connection system to extend power in multi-axis configurations. Safe torque-off via hardwired (STO) connector.
2198-Hxxx-ERS2 Same power structures with standalone and multi-axis bus-sharing capability. Safe torque-off via the EtherNet/IP network.
Use for energy storage and/or to improve performance in applications producing regenerative energy and requiring shorter duty
Kinetix 5500 2198-CAPMOD-1300 cycles (1360 μf). Modules are zero-stacked side-by-side with servo drives and use the shared-bus connection system to extend
Capacitor Module power.
Shared-bus 2198-H040-x-x Input wiring connectors and DC bus T-connector for frame 1 and 2 servo drives.
Connector Kits 2198-H070-x-x Input wiring connectors and DC bus T-connector for frame 3 servo drives.
Feedback 2198-KITCON-DSL Replacement feedback connector kit with 2-pin connector plug and grounding plate inside the connector housing.
Connector Kit
Hiperface to DSL 2198-H2DCK Use the 2198-H2DCK (series B or later) Hiperface-to-DSL feedback converter kit with MP-Series (Bulletin MPL, MPM, MPF, and
Converter Kit (series B or later) MPS) rotary motors, MP-Series (Bulletin MPAS ballscrew, MPAR, MPAI) linear actuators, and LDAT-Series linear thrusters.
2198-KITCON-IOSP Replacement I/O connector kit (spring clamp) for I/O (IOD) connector.
I/O Connector Kits
2198-KITCON-IOSC Replacement I/O connector kit (screw terminal) for I/O (IOD) connector.
2198-KITCON-PWR40 Replacement connector set, 40 A, for frame 1 and frame 2 drives.
Connector Sets 2198-KITCON-PWR70 Replacement connector set, 70 A, for frame 3 drives.
2198-KITCON-CAP1300 Replacement connector set, 40 A, for capacitor module.

Chapter 1 Start
Table 2 - Kinetix 5500 Drive System Overview (continued)

Drive System Cat. No. Description
Component
Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP network in CompactLogix 5370 controllers and Integrated Safety in Compact GuardLogix
Bulletin 1769 5370 controllers. Linear, device-level ring (DLR), and star topology is supported.
Logix5000
Controller Platform 1756-EN2T module EtherNet/IP network communication modules for use with ControlLogix 5570, ControlLogix 5580, and GuardLogix 5570
1756-EN2TR module controllers. Linear, device-level ring (DLR), and star topology is supported.
1756-EN3TR module
Studio 5000 Logix Designer application, version 21.00 or later, provides support for programming, commissioning, and
Studio 5000® N/A maintaining the CompactLogix and ControlLogix controller families. Version 24.00 or later is required for 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo
Environment drives.
VPL-Axxxx, VPL-Bxxxx
VPF-Axxxx, VPF-Bxxxx Compatible rotary motors include 200V and 400V-class Kinetix VP (Bulletin VPL, VPF, and VPS).
Rotary Servo VPS-Bxxxx
Motors
Compatible rotary motors include 200V and 400V-class MP-Series (Bulletin MPL, MPM, MPF, and MPS) when used with the
MP-Series Hiperface-to-DSL feedback converter kit.
MP-Series Compatible linear actuators include 200V and 400V-class MP-Series (Bulletin MPAS ballscrew, MPAR, and MPAI) and LDAT-Series
Linear Actuators LDAT-Series when used with the Hiperface-to-DSL feedback converter kit.
Induction Motors N/A Induction motors with open loop frequency control are also supported.
Bulletin 2090 flying-lead single-cable for motor power, feedback, and 24V DC brake power with Kinetix VP motors. Designed
2090-CSxM1DF-xxAxxx specifically for Kinetix 5500 servo drives.
Bulletin 2090 flying-lead single cable for motor power, feedback, and 24V DC brake power with Kinetix VP motors. Designed with
2090-CSxM1DG-xxAxxx longer leads than 2090-CSxM1DF cables to accommodate Kinetix 5500 or Kinetix 5700 drive families.
Cables
2090-CFBM7DF-CEAxxx Bulletin 2090 motor feedback cables for MP-Series motors and actuators.
2090-CPxM7DF-xxAxxx Bulletin 2090 motor power/brake cables for MP-Series motors and actuators.
1585J-M8CBJM-x Ethernet cables are available in standard lengths. Shielded cable is recommended.
2198-DB08-F
AC Line Filters 2198-DB20-F Bulletin 2198 three-phase AC line filters are required to meet CE and available for use in all Kinetix 5500 drive systems.
2198-DB42-F
24V DC Power 1606-XLxxx Bulletin 1606 24V DC power supply for control circuitry, digital inputs, safety, and motor brake.
Supply
External Shunt 2097-R6 and 2097-R7 Bulletin 2097 external passive shunt resistors for when the drive’s internal shunt capability is exceeded.
Resistors

Start Chapter 1
Drive Hardware and Input Typical Kinetix 5500 systems include single-phase and three-phase standalone
configurations, three-phase shared AC, shared AC/DC, shared DC, and
Power Configurations shared AC/DC hybrid configurations.
Standalone Configurations
In these examples, a single standalone drive is shown with and without the
Bulletin 2198 capacitor module.
Figure 1 - Typical Kinetix 5500 Standalone Installation

Single-phase or
Three-phase
Input Power
Bonded Cabinet
Line Ground Bus
Disconnect 2198-Hxxx-ERSx Drive (top view)
2198-DBxx-F 2198-Hxxx-ERSx Drive
Device
AC Line Filter (top view) with 2198-CAPMOD-1300
Input (required for CE) Capacitor Module
Fusing
Mains AC input wired to
standard input connector.
Mains AC and 24V input
wired to standard input Shared DC (DC common bus)
connectors.
Shared 24V (control power input)
1606-XLxxx
24V DC Control, Digital Inputs, Allen-Bradley
1606-XL
Powe r S u p p l y
and Motor Brake Power

(customer-supplied) Input
AC Input Power
2198-H0x0-x-x shared-bus
connection system for bus-
2198-Hxxx-ERSx Drive sharing configurations.
(front view)
2097-Rx
Digital Inputs Shunt Resistor
to Sensors and Control String (optional component)

Chapter 1 Start
In this example, three-phase AC power and 24V control power is shared in a

multi-axis configuration. All drives must have the same power rating (catalog
number).
Figure 2 - Typical Shared AC Installations

Three-phase
Input Power
Line
Bonded Cabinet Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives (top view)
Disconnect
Ground Bus (2198-H008-ERS drives shown)
Device
2198-DBxx-F
Input AC Line Filter
Fusing (required for CE)
Shared AC (mains AC input)
1606-XLxxx
1606-XL

Power S u p p l y
(customer-supplied)
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives (front view)
Input
AC Input Power (2198-H008-ERS drives shown)

Shared-bus connection system
for bus-sharing configurations.
2097-Rx
IMPORTANT In shared AC configurations, all drives must have the same power rating.
Shared AC configurations do not support Bulletin 2198 capacitor modules.

Start Chapter 1
Shared AC/DC Configurations
In this example, three-phase AC input power, 24V control power, and DC-bus
power are shared in a multi-axis configuration. All drives must be the same
power rating (catalog number).
Figure 3 - Typical Shared AC/DC Installations

Three-phase
Input Power
Line
Disconnect Bonded Cabinet Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives (top view)
Device Ground Bus (2198-H015-ERS drives shown)
2198-DBxx-F
Input 2198-CAPMOD-1300 Capacitor Module
AC Line Filter
Fusing (optional component)
(required for CE)

Shared DC (DC common bus)
1606-XLxxx
Allen-Bradley
24V DC Control, Digital Inputs, 1606-XL

Powe r S u p p l y

Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives (front view)

AC Input Power (2198-H015-ERS drives shown)
Shared-bus connection system for
bus-sharing configurations.
Digital Inputs 2097-Rx

to Sensors and Control String Shunt Resistor
(optional component)
IMPORTANT In shared AC/DC configurations, all drives must have the same power rating
(catalog number).

Chapter 1 Start
Shared DC Common-bus Configurations
In this multi-axis example, the common-bus leader (sourcing) drive receives

three-phase AC input power and supplies DC power to common-bus follower
(sinking) drives. The common-bus leader-drive power rating is greater than or
equal to the power rating of each follower drive.
Figure 4 - Typical Shared DC Common-bus Installations

Three-phase
Input Power
Line Bonded Cabinet

Disconnect Ground Bus Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System (top view)
Device
2198-DBxx-F

1606-XLxxx
1606-XL
Powe r S u p p l y

Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System (front view)

AC Input Power
Shared-bus connection system
for bus-sharing configurations.
Digital Inputs 2097-Rx

to Sensors and Control String Shunt Resistor
2198-H008-ERS
2198-H040-ERS Common-bus 2198-CAPMOD-1300 Capacitor Module
Common-bus Leader Drive Follower Drives (optional component)
(
IMPORTANT In shared DC common-bus configurations, the leader drive power rating

must be greater than or equal to the power rating of the follower drives.

Start Chapter 1
Shared AC/DC Hybrid Configuration
In this multi-axis example, three-phase AC input power is supplied to two

converter drives. The converter drive ratings must be the same, and greater
than or equal to the power ratings of the inverter drives. This parallel converter
configuration increases the DC-bus power supplied to the inverter drives.
Figure 5 - Typical Shared AC/DC Bus Hybrid Installations

Three-phase
Input Power
Line Bonded Cabinet

Disconnect Ground Bus Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System (top view)
Device
2198-DBxx-F
1606-XLxxx
1606-XL

Powe r S u p p l y
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System (front view)
AC Input Power Shared-bus connection system for
bus-sharing configurations.
2097-Rx
2198-H040-ERS 2198-H008-ERS
Common-bus (inverter) 2198-CAPMOD-1300 Capacitor Module
Common-bus (converter)
Follower Drives (optional component)
Leader Drives
IMPORTANT In shared AC/DC hybrid configuration, the converter drives must have the
same power rating and must be greater than or equal to the power ratings
of the inverter drives.

Chapter 1 Start
Motor Feedback and Feedback connections are made at the 2-pin motor feedback (MF) connector.
These examples illustrate how you can use the Bulletin 2198 connector kits for
Feedback-only making these connections. To see motor power and brake connections, refer to
Configurations Chapter 5 on page 71.
Figure 6 - Feedback Configuration Examples
2198-Hxxx-ERSx Drive
(front view)
2-pin Motor Feedback

(MF) Connector
2090-CSBM1DF or 2090-CSBM1DG
Single Motor Cables
Kinetix VP Rotary Motors

2198-KITCON-DSL Connector Kit (VPL-Bxxxx motor is shown)
• Accepts DSL motor feedback from Kinetix VP
(Bulletin VPL, VPF, VPS) rotary motors
• Feedback-only (DSL)
MP-Series Rotary Motors

(MPL-Bxxxx motor is shown)
2198-H2DCK Converter Kit Bulletin 2090 Motor Power and Feedback Cables
Converts 15-pin Hiperface feedback into 2-pin DSL feedback for:
• MP-Series rotary motors and linear actuators
• LDAT-Series linear thrusters
• Feedback-only (absolute single-turn/multi-turn Hiperface)
LDAT-Sxxxxxx-xDx
Linear Thrusters
MP-Series Linear Actuators

(MPAR-B3xxxx electric cylinder is shown)
MP-Series Linear Actuators
(MPAS-B9xxx ballscrew linear stage is shown)
Induction Rotary Motors MP-Series Linear Actuators

(no feedback, V/Hz) (MPAI-B3xxxx heavy-duty electric cylinder is shown)
IMPORTANT In 2198-H2DCK converter kit applications, you can replace the 2090-
CPxM7DF power/brake cable with a 2090-CSBM1DF single motor cable, and
reuse the 2090-CFBM7DF feedback cable. This increases the maximum cable
length for 18 and 14 AWG single cables to 50 m (164 ft). 2090-CSxM1DF-
10Axxx (10 AWG) cables do not support this 50 m (164 ft) option.

Start Chapter 1
Typical Communication The Kinetix 5500 drives support any Ethernet topology including linear, ring,
and star by using ControlLogix, GuardLogix, or CompactLogix controllers.
Configurations
These examples feature the CompactLogix 5370 programmable automation
controllers (Bulletin 1769) with support for Integrated Motion over the
EtherNet/IP network. Controller features include the following:
• Supports up to 16 axes
• Supports up to 48 devices in linear configurations
• Dual-port connectivity to support device-level ring (DLR) topology
Refer to CompactLogix Controllers Specifications Technical Data, publication

1769-TD005, for more information on CompactLogix 5370 L1, L2, and L3
controllers.
Linear Topology
In this example, all devices are connected in linear topology. The Kinetix 5500
drives include dual-port connectivity, however, if any device becomes
disconnected, all devices downstream of that device lose communication.
Devices without dual ports must include the 1783-ETAP module or be
connected at the end of the line.
Figure 7 - Kinetix 5500 Linear Communication Installation
CompactLogix Controller Programming Network
CompactLogix 5370 Controller Logix Designer

Application
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System
1585J-M8CBJM-OM15
1585J-M8CBJM-x 0.15 m (6 in.) Ethernet cable
Ethernet (shielded) Cable for drive-to-drive connections.
842E-CM Integrated
1734-AENTR POINT I/O™ Motion Encoder
PanelView™ Plus EtherNet/IP Adapter
Display Terminal
002 1734-AENTR
POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power
Link 2
Activity/
Status

Chapter 1 Start
Ring Topology
In this example, the devices are connected by using ring topology. If only one
device in the ring is disconnected, the rest of the devices continue to
communicate. For ring topology to work correctly, a device level ring (DLR)
supervisor is required (for example, the Bulletin 1783 ETAP device). DLR is
an ODVA standard. For more information, refer to the EtherNet/IP
Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide, publication ENET-AP005.
Devices without dual ports, for example the display terminal, require a
1783-ETAP module to complete the network ring.
Figure 8 - Kinetix 5500 Ring Communication Installation

Application
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)
PanelView Plus
1783-ETAP Display Terminal
Module
002 1734-AENTR
POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
1734-AENTR POINT I/O

Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power
EtherNet/IP Adapter
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System Link 2
Activity/
Status
842E-CM Integrated
Motion Encoder
1585J-M8CBJM-x Ethernet
(shielded) Cable
1585J-M8CBJM-OM15
0.15 m (6 in.) Ethernet cable
for drive-to-drive connections.

Start Chapter 1
Star Topology
In this example, the devices are connected by using star topology. Each device is
connected directly to the switch.
Kinetix 5500 drives have dual ports, so linear topology is maintained from
drive-to-drive, but Kinetix 5500 drives and other devices operate
independently. The loss of one device does not impact the operation of other
devices.
Figure 9 - Kinetix 5500 Star Communication Installation

Application
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)
1585J-M8CBJM-x
Ethernet (shielded) Cable
1585J-M8CBJM-OM15
1783-BMS 0.15 m (6 in.) Ethernet cable
Stratix 5700™ for drive-to-drive connections.
Switch
PanelView Plus
Display Terminal
842E-CM Integrated
Motion Encoder
1734-AENTR POINT I/O
EtherNet/IP Adapter

Chapter 1 Start
Safe Torque-off Kinetix 5500 servo drives are available with safe torque-off via hardwired
connections or integrated over the EtherNet/IP network. These examples
Configurations illustrate the safe torque-off configuration options.
Hardwired Safety Configuration
The 2198-Hxxx-ERS drives use the safe torque-off (STO) connector for
wiring external safety devices and cascading hardwired safety connections from
one drive to another.
Figure 10 - Safe Torque-off (hardwired) Configuration
CompactLogix 5370 Controller or Compact GuardLogix 5370 Safety Controller,

ControlLogix 5570 Controller or GuardLogix 5570 Safety Controller,
ControlLogix 5580 Controller
(CompactLogix 5370 controller is shown)
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
2198-Hxxx-ERS Servo Drives

1 (Front)
2 (Rear)
Logix Designer (top view)

Application
(version 21.0 or later)
1585J-M8CBJM-x
Module Definition Ethernet (shielded) Cable
Configured with
Motion-only
Connection
Safe Torque-off
(STO) Connectors
1606-XLxxx Safety
1606-XL
Device
Powe r S u p p l y
and Motor Brake Power 2198-Hxxx-ERS Servo Drives

(front view)
AC Input Power
Digital Inputs to Sensors and Control String
ControlLogix 5580 Controller

1 GB EtherNet/IP port for
applications that require Logix5585
SAFETY ON
TM
NET
DC INPUT DC INPUT AC OUTPUT
0000
high performance. RUN FORCE SD OK
LINK
Kinetix VP
Servo Motors 2198-CAPMOD-1300 Capacitor Module

Start Chapter 1
Integrated Safety Configurations
The GuardLogix 5570 or Compact GuardLogix 5370 safety controller issues

the safe torque-off (STO) command over the EtherNet/IP network and the
2198-Hxxx-ERS2 integrated safety drive executes the command.
In this example, a single GuardLogix safety controller makes a Motion and

Safety connection with the 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 integrated safety drives.
IMPORTANT If only one controller is used in an application with Motion and Safety
connections, the controller must be a GuardLogix 5570 or Compact
GuardLogix 5370 safety controller.
Figure 11 - Motion and Safety Configuration (single controller)
EtherNet/IP
Compact GuardLogix 5370 or

GuardLogix 5570 Safety Controller
LNK1 LNK2 NET OK
(GuardLogix 5570 Safety Controller is shown)
1
2198-Hxxx-ERS2 Servo Drives
Logix Designer (top view)
Application 1585J-M8CBJM-x
(version 24.0 or later) Ethernet (shielded) Cable
Module Definition
Configured with 1734-AENTR
Motion and Safety POINT Guard I/O
Connections EtherNet/IP Adapter
Safety
1783-BMS Device
Stratix 5700
Switch 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 Servo Drives
1606-XLxxx Allen-Bradley
(front view)
24V DC Control, Digital Inputs, 1606-XL
Powe r S u p p l y

AC Input Power
Motion and Safety Connections to the Drive
Kinetix VP
2198-CAPMOD-1300 Capacitor Module
Servo Motors

Chapter 1 Start
In this example, a non-safety controller makes the Motion-only connection

and a separate GuardLogix safety controller makes the Safety-only connection
with 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 integrated safety drives.
IMPORTANT If two controllers are used in an application with Motion-only and

Safety-only connections, the Safety-only connection must be a
GuardLogix 5570 or Compact GuardLogix 5370 safety controller and the
Motion-only connection must be a ControlLogix 5570 or
CompactLogix 5370 controller.
Figure 12 - Motion and Safety Configuration (multi-controller)
EtherNet/IP
EtherNet/IP
LNK1 LNK2 NET OK

LNK1 LNK2 NET OK
2
2
1
1
CompactLogix 5370 Controller, Logix Designer Compact GuardLogix 5370 or

ControlLogix 5570 Controller, or Application GuardLogix 5570 Safety Controller
ControlLogix 5580 Controller (version 24.0 or later) (GuardLogix 5570 Safety Controller is shown)
(ControlLogix 5570 controller is shown)
Safety Program
Module Definition
Motion Program Configured with Safety
Module Definition only Connection
Configured with
Motion only
Connection
2198-Hxxx-ERS2 Servo Drives
1734-AENTR
(top view)
POINT Guard I/O
EtherNet/IP Adapter
1783-BMS Safety
Stratix 5700 Device
Switch
1606-XLxxx Allen-Bradley
1585J-M8CBJM-x 24V DC Control, Digital Inputs, 1606-XL

Powe r S u p p l y
Ethernet (shielded) Cable and Motor Brake Power 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 Servo Drives
(front view)
AC Input Power
Motion and Safety Connections to the Drive
Kinetix VP 2198-CAPMOD-1300 Capacitor Module

Servo Motors (optional component)

Start Chapter 1
Catalog Number Explanation Kinetix 5500 drive catalog numbers and performance descriptions.
Table 3 - Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive Catalog Numbers

Continuous Output Continuous Output
Drive Cat. No. Drive Cat. No. Power Current
Frame Size Input Voltage
(hardwired STO) (integrated STO)
kW A 0-pk
0.2 kW
2198-H003-ERS 2198-H003-ERS2 0.3 kW 1.4
0.6 kW
1
195…264V rms, single-phase 0.5 kW
2198-H008-ERS 2198-H008-ERS2 195…264V rms, three-phase 0.8 kW 3.5
324…528V rms, three-phase 1.6 kW
1.0 kW
2198-H015-ERS 2198-H015-ERS2 1.5 KW 7.1
3.2 kW
2 2.4 kW
2198-H025-ERS 2198-H025-ERS2 11.3
5.1 kW
2198-H040-ERS 2198-H040-ERS2 18.4
7.0 kW
2198-H070-ERS 2198-H070-ERS2 3 32.5
14.6 kW
Table 4 - Capacitor Module Catalog Number

Capacitor Module Frame Size Rated Voltage Capacitance
Cat. No.
2198-CAPMOD-1300 2 650V DC, nom 1360 μF, min
Table 5 - Shared-bus Connector Kit Catalog Numbers

Kit Cat. No. Frame Size Application Description
• Mains AC input wiring connector
2198-H040-ADP-IN Frame 1 or 2 First drive • 24V DC input wiring connector
• DC bus T-connector
2198-H040-A-T AC sharing only AC bus T-connector
Next drive is…
2198-H040-D-T Frame 1 drives: DC sharing only DC bus T-connector
2198-H040-P-T 2198-H003-ERSx Control power sharing only Control power T-connector
2198-H008-ERSx
2198-H040-AD-T AC and DC bus sharing AC and DC bus T-connectors
Frame 2 drives:
2198-H040-AP-T 2198-H015-ERSx AC and control power sharing AC and control power T-connectors
2198-H025-ERSx
2198-H040-DP-T DC and control power sharing DC and control power T-connectors
2198-H040-ERSx
2198-H040-ADP-T AC, DC, and control power sharing AC, DC, and control power T-connectors
Frame 3 drive: • Mains AC input wiring connector

2198-H070-ADP-IN First drive • 24V DC input wiring connector
2198-H070-ERSx • DC bus T-connector
2198-H070-A-T AC sharing only AC bus T-connector
2198-H070-D-T DC sharing only DC bus T-connector
2198-H070-P-T Control power sharing only Control power T-connector
Next drive is…
2198-H070-AD-T Frame 3 drives: AC and DC bus sharing AC and DC bus T-connectors
2198-H070-ERSx
2198-H070-AP-T AC and control power sharing AC and control power T-connectors
2198-H070-DP-T DC and control power sharing DC and control power T-connectors
2198-H070-ADP-T AC, DC, and control power sharing AC, DC, and control power T-connectors

Chapter 1 Start
Agency Compliance If this product is installed within the European Union and has the CE mark,
the following regulations apply.
ATTENTION: Meeting CE requires a grounded system, and the method of

grounding the AC line filter and drive must match. Failure to do this renders
the filter ineffective and can cause damage to the filter. For grounding
examples, refer to Grounded Power Configurations on page 73.
For more information on electrical noise reduction, refer to the System Design
for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001.
To meet CE requirements, these requirements apply:

• Install an AC line filter (catalog number 2198-DBxx-F) for input power
as close to the Kinetix 5500 drive as possible.
• Bond drive, capacitor module, and line filter grounding screws by using a
braided ground strap as shown in Figure 42 on page 78.
• Use Bulletin 2090 single motor cables with Kinetix VP servo motors.
Use Bulletin 2090 motor power/brake and feedback cables for other
compatible Allen-Bradley motors and actuators.
• Combined motor cable length for all axes on the same DC bus must not
exceed 250 m (820 ft). Drive-to-motor cables must not exceed 50 m
(164 ft); however, use of continuous-flex cable and 2198-H2DCK
converter kit limits the maximum length.
Table 6 - Drive-to-Motor Maximum Cable Length

Kinetix VP Servo Motors Other Compatible Rotary Motors/Linear Actuators (2)
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive Continuous-flex Cables (1)

Standard (non-flex) Cables Bulletin 2090 Motor/Actuator Cables (3)
Cat. No. Cat. No. 2090-CSBM1DF/DG-xxAFxx
Cat. No. 2090-CSxM1DF/DG-xxAAxx Cat. No. 2090-CxxM7DF
Cat. No. 2090-CSBM1E1-xxAFxx
m (ft) m (ft)
m (ft)
2198-H003-ERSx
50 (164) 30 (98.4)
2198-H008-ERSx
2198-H015-ERSx
20 (65.6)
2198-H025-ERSx 50 (164)
2198-H040-ERSx
2198-H070-ERSx 50 (164)
(1) When using 2090-CSBM1E1 cable in your continuous-flex application, the maximum cable length including the standard (non-flex) cable back to the drive, is 30 m (98.4 ft)
(2) Requires use of the 2198-H2DCK Hiperface-to-DSL (series B or later) feedback converter kit.
(3) The 20 m (65.6 ft) limitation is attributed to the 2090-CPxM7DF power/brake cable. In 2198-H2DCK converter kit applications, you can replace the 2090-CPxM7DF power/brake cable with a
2090-CSBM1DF or 2090-CSBM1DG single motor cable (and reuse the 2090-CFBM7DF feedback cable) to increase the maximum cable length to 50 m (164 ft). This applies to only 18 and 14 AWG single
cables. 2090-CSxM1DF-10Axxx (10 AWG) cables and any other 2090-CSxM1DF/DG cables with M40 or M58 connectors do not support this 50 m (164 ft) option.
• Install the Kinetix 5500 system inside an approved enclosure. Run input
power wiring in conduit (grounded to the enclosure) outside of the
enclosure. Separate signal and power cables.
• Segregate input power wiring from control wiring and motor cables.
Refer to Appendix A on page 201 for input power wiring and drive/motor
interconnect diagrams.

Chapter 2
Plan the Kinetix 5500 Drive System Installation
This chapter describes system installation guidelines used in preparation for

mounting your Kinetix 5500 drive components.
Topic Page
System Design Guidelines 32
Electrical Noise Reduction 38
ATTENTION: Plan the installation of your system so that you can perform all
cutting, drilling, tapping, and welding with the system removed from the
enclosure. Because the system is of the open type construction, be careful to
keep metal debris from falling into it. Metal debris or other foreign matter
can become lodged in the circuitry and result in damage to the components.

Chapter 2 Plan the Kinetix 5500 Drive System Installation
System Design Guidelines Use the information in this section when designing your enclosure and
planning to mount your system components on the panel.
For on-line product selection and system configuration tools, including

AutoCAD (DXF) drawings of the product, refer to
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/en/e-tools.
System Mounting Requirements

• To comply with UL and CE requirements, the Kinetix 5500 drive
systems must be enclosed in a grounded conductive enclosure offering
protection as defined in standard EN 60529 (IEC 529) to IP54 such
that they are not accessible to an operator or unskilled person. A NEMA
4X enclosure exceeds these requirements providing protection to IP66.
• The panel you install inside the enclosure for mounting your system
components must be on a flat, rigid, vertical surface that won’t be
subjected to shock, vibration, moisture, oil mist, dust, or corrosive
vapors in accordance with protection class IP20 (EN 60529) and
pollution degree 2 (EN 61800-5-1).
• Size the drive enclosure so as not to exceed the maximum ambient
temperature rating. Consider heat dissipation specifications for all drive
components.
• Combined motor power cable length for all axes on the same DC bus
must not exceed 250 m (820 ft). Drive-to-motor cables must not exceed
50 m (164 ft), however use of continuous-flex cable and 2198-H2DCK
converter kit limits the maximum length. Refer to Table 6 on page 30
for specifications by frame size.
IMPORTANT System performance was tested at these cable length

specifications. These limitations also apply when meeting CE
requirements.
• Ethernet cable must be shielded and cables connecting drive-to-drive,

drive-to-controller, or drive-to-switch must not exceed 100 m (328 ft).
• Registration and digital input cables greater than 30 m (98.4 ft) must be
shielded.
• Segregate input power wiring from control wiring and motor cables.
• Use high-frequency (HF) bonding techniques to connect the modules,
enclosure, machine frame, and motor housing, and to provide a low-
impedance return path for high-frequency (HF) energy and reduce
electrical noise.
Bond drive, capacitor module, and line filter grounding screws by using a
braided ground strap as shown in Figure 42 on page 78.
Refer to the System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual,
publication GMC-RM001, to better understand the concept of electrical noise
reduction.

Plan the Kinetix 5500 Drive System Installation Chapter 2
Transformer Selection
The servo drive does not require an isolation transformer for three-phase input
power. However, a transformer can be required to match the voltage
requirements of the drive to the available service.
To size a transformer for the main AC power inputs, refer to the Kinetix 5500
power specifications in the Kinetix Servo Drives Technical Data, publication
GMC-TD003.
IMPORTANT When using an autotransformer, make sure that the phase to neutral/
ground voltage does not exceed the input voltage ratings of the drive.
IMPORTANT Use a form factor of 1.5 for three-phase power (where form factor is used to
compensate for transformer, drive module, and motor losses, and to account
for utilization in the intermittent operating area of the torque speed curve).
IMPORTANT A line reactor must be used if the source transformer is greater than
150 KVA, max and 3% impedance, min.
EXAMPLE Sizing a transformer to the voltage requirements of this drive:

2198-H040-ERSx = 8.4 kW = 12.6 KVA transformer.
Circuit Breaker/Fuse Selection
The Kinetix 5500 drives use internal solid-state motor short-circuit protection
and, when protected by suitable branch circuit protection, are rated for use on
a circuit capable of delivering up to 200,000 A (fuses) and 65,000 A (circuit
breakers).
Refer to Power Wiring Examples, on page 202, for the wiring diagram.
ATTENTION: Do not use circuit protection devices on the output of an AC

drive as an isolating disconnect switch or motor overload device. These
devices are designed to operate on sine wave voltage and the drive’s PWM
waveform does not allow it to operate properly. As a result, damage to the
device occurs.

Standalone Drive Systems
Kinetix 5500 Drives UL Applications IEC (non-UL) Applications

Bussmann Fuses Molded Case CB DIN gG Fuses Molded Case CB
Drive Cat. No. Drive Voltage, nom Phase
Cat. No. Cat. No. Amps (max) Cat. No.
240V Single-phase KTK-R-2 140U-D6D2-B10 2 140U-D6D2-B10
2198-H003-ERSx
240/480V Three-phase KTK-R-3 140U-D6D3-B20 4 140U-D6D3-B20
2198-H008-ERSx
240/480V Three-phase KTK-R-7 140U-D6D3-B60 6 140U-D6D3-B60
2198-H015-ERSx
240/480V Three-phase KTK-R-15 140U-D6D3-C12 16 140U-D6D3-C12
2198-H025-ERSx 240/480V Three-phase KTK-R-20 140U-D6D3-C20 20 140U-D6D3-C20
2198-H040-ERSx 240/480V Three-phase KTK-R-25 140U-D6D3-C25 25 140U-D6D3-C25
2198-H070-ERSx 240/480V Three-phase LPJ-35SP 140G-G6C3-C40 35 140G-G6C3-C40
Shared DC (common-bus) Drive Systems
Drive Voltage, UL Applications IEC (non-UL) Applications

Kinetix 5500 Drive
(three-phase) Bussmann Fuses Molded Case CB DIN gG Fuses Molded Case CB
Cat. No.
nom Cat. No. Cat. No. Amps (max) Cat. No.
2198-H003-ERSx 240/480V KTK-R-10 N/A 10 N/A
2198-H008-ERSx 240/480V KTK-R-10 N/A 10 N/A
2198-H015-ERSx 240/480V KTK-R-15 140U-D6D3-C15 16 140U-D6D3-C15
2198-H070-ERSx 240/480V LPJ-35SP 140G-G6C3-C40 35 140G-G6C3-C40
Shared AC Drive Systems
Table 7 - Input Power UL Circuit-protection Specifications

Bussmann Fuses Molded Case CB
Kinetix 5500 Drive Drive Voltage,
(three-phase) Cat. No. Cat. No.
Cat. No. nom
2 Axes 3 Axes 4 Axes 5 Axes 2 Axes 3 Axes 4 Axes 5 Axes
2198-H003-ERSx 240/480V KTK-R-15 N/A
2198-H008-ERSx 240/480V KTK-R-15 N/A
2198-H015-ERSx 240/480V KTK-R-20 KTK-R-25 N/A 140U-D6D3-C15 140U-D6D3-C20 N/A
2198-H025-ERSx 240/480V KTK-R-30 N/A 140U-D6D3-C25 140U-D6D3-C30 N/A
2198-H040-ERSx 240/480V LPJ-35SP LPJ-45SP N/A N/A
2198-H070-ERSx 240/480V LPJ-60SP N/A 140G-G6C3-C60 N/A

Table 8 - Input Power IEC (non-UL) Circuit-protection Specifications

DIN gG Fuses Molded Case CB
Kinetix 5500 Drive Drive Voltage,
(three-phase) Amps (max) Cat. No.
Cat. No. nom
2 Axes 3 Axes 4 Axes 5 Axes 2 Axes 3 Axes 4 Axes 5 Axes
2198-H003-ERSx 240/480V 16 N/A
2198-H008-ERSx 240/480V 16 N/A
2198-H015-ERSx 240/480V 20 25 N/A 140U-D6D3-C15 140U-D6D3-C20 N/A
2198-H025-ERSx 240/480V 32 N/A 140U-D6D3-C25 140U-D6D3-C30 N/A
2198-H040-ERSx 240/480V 35 N/A N/A
2198-H070-ERSx 240/480V 63 N/A 140G-G6C3-C60 N/A
Shared AC/DC and Hybrid Systems
Table 9 - Input Power UL Circuit-protection Specifications

Bussmann Fuse Molded Case CB
Kinetix 5500 Drive Voltage,
(three-phase) Cat. No. Cat. No.
Drive Cat. No. nom
2 Axes 3 Axes 4 Axes 5 Axes 6 Axes 7 Axes 8 Axes 2 Axes 3 Axes 4 Axes 5 Axes 6 Axes 7 Axes 8 Axes
2198-H003-ERSx 240/480V KTK-R-10 KTK-R-15 N/A
2198-H008-ERSx 240/480V KTK-R-15 KTK-R-20 N/A
2198-H040-ERSx 240/480V KTK-R-30 LPJ-45SP LPJ-50SP N/A 140U-D6D3-C30 N/A
2198-H070-ERSx 240/480V LPJ-50SP N/A 140G-G6C3-C50 N/A
Table 10 - Input Power IEC (non-UL) Circuit-protection Specifications
Drive Voltage, DIN gG Fuses Molded Case CB

Kinetix 5500 Amps (max) Cat. No.
Drive Cat. No. (three-phase)
nom
2 Axes 3 Axes 4 Axes 5 Axes 6 Axes 7 Axes 8 Axes 2 Axes 3 Axes 4 Axes 5 Axes 6 Axes 7 Axes 8 Axes
2198-H003-ERSx 240/480V 10 16 N/A
2198-H008-ERSx 240/480V 16 N/A N/A
2198-H040-ERSx 240/480V 32 N/A 140U-D6D3-C30 N/A
2198-H070-ERSx 240/480V 50 N/A 140G-G6C3-C50 N/A

Enclosure Selection
This example is provided to assist you in sizing an enclosure for your

Kinetix 5500 drive system. You need heat dissipation data from all components
planned for your enclosure to calculate the enclosure size (refer to Table 11).
With no active method of heat dissipation (such as fans or air conditioning)

either of the following approximate equations can be used.
Metric Standard English
0.38Q 4.08Q
A= A=
1.8T - 1.1 T - 1.1
Where T is temperature difference between inside air Where T is temperature difference between inside air
and outside ambient (°C), Q is heat generated in and outside ambient (°F), Q is heat generated in
enclosure (Watts), and A is enclosure surface area (m2). enclosure (Watts), and A is enclosure surface area (ft2).
The exterior surface of all six sides of an enclosure is The exterior surface of all six sides of an enclosure is
calculated as calculated as
A = 2dw + 2dh + 2wh A = (2dw + 2dh + 2wh) /144
Where d (depth), w (width), and h (height) are in meters.
If the maximum ambient rating of the Kinetix 5500 drive system is 50 °C

(122 °F) and if the maximum environmental temperature is 20 °C (68 °F), then
T=30. In this example, the total heat dissipation is 416 W (sum of all
components in enclosure). So, in the equation below, T=30 and Q=416.
0.38 (416)
A= = 2.99 m 2
1.8 (30) - 1.1
In this example, the enclosure must have an exterior surface of at least 2.99 m2.
If any portion of the enclosure is not able to transfer heat, do not include that
value in the calculation.
Because the minimum cabinet depth to house the Kinetix 5500 system
(selected for this example) is 300 mm (11.8 in.), the cabinet needs to be
approximately 1500 x 700 x 300 mm (59.0 x 27.6 x 11.8 in.) HxWxD.
1.5 x (0.300 x 0.70) + 1.5 x (0.300 x 2.0) + 1.5 x (0.70 x 2.0) = 3.31 m2
Because this cabinet size is considerably larger than what is necessary to house
the system components, it can be more efficient to provide a means of cooling
in a smaller cabinet. Contact your cabinet manufacturer for options available to
cool your cabinet.

Table 11 - Power Dissipation Specifications

Usage as % of Rated Power Output
Kinetix 5500 Drive Frame (watts)
Cat. No. Size
20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
2198-H003-ERSx
1 12 25 37 50 62
2198-H008-ERSx
2198-H015-ERSx
2198-H025-ERSx 2 40 80 120 160 200
2198-H040-ERSx
2198-H070-ERSx 3 64 128 192 256 320
Minimum Clearance Requirements
This section provides information to assist you in sizing your cabinet and
positioning your Kinetix 5500 drive:
• Additional clearance is required for cables and wires or the shared-bus
connection system connected to the top of the drive.
• Additional clearance is required if other devices are installed above and/
or below the drive and have clearance requirements of their own.
• Additional clearance left and right of the drive is required when
mounted adjacent to noise sensitive equipment or clean wire ways.
• The recommended minimum cabinet depth is 300 mm (11.81 in.).
Figure 13 - Minimum Clearance Requirements

40 mm (1.57 in.) clearance above
drive for airflow and installation.
Kinetix 5500
Servo Drive
Clearance left of the Clearance right of the

drive is not required. drive is not required.
Refer to the Kinetix Servo Drives

Technical Data, publication GMC-TD003,
40 mm (1.57 in.) clearance below for Kinetix 5500 drive dimensions.
drive for airflow and installation.
IMPORTANT Mount the drive in an upright position as shown. Do not mount the drive on its side.

In multi-axis shared-bus configurations, drives must be spaced by

aligning the zero-stack tab and cutout.
Figure 14 - Multi-axis Shared-bus Clearance Requirements
Shared-bus connection system for

bus-sharing configurations is not
shown for clarity.
Zero-stack Tab and
Cutout Aligned
Electrical Noise Reduction This section outlines best practices that minimize the possibility of noise-
related failures as they apply specifically to Kinetix 5500 system installations.
For more information on the concept of high-frequency (HF) bonding, the
ground plane principle, and electrical noise reduction, refer to the System
Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-
RM001.
Bonding Modules
Bonding is the practice of connecting metal chassis, assemblies, frames, shields,
and enclosures to reduce the effects of electromagnetic interference (EMI).
Unless specified, most paints are not conductive and act as insulators. To
achieve a good bond between power rail and the subpanel, surfaces need to be
paint-free or plated. Bonding metal surfaces creates a low-impedance return
path for high-frequency energy.
IMPORTANT To improve the bond between the power rail and subpanel, construct your
subpanel out of zinc plated (paint-free) steel.
Improper bonding of metal surfaces blocks the direct return path and allows
high-frequency energy to travel elsewhere in the cabinet. Excessive high-
frequency energy can effect the operation of other microprocessor controlled
equipment.

These illustrations show details of recommended bonding practices for painted

panels, enclosures, and mounting brackets.
Figure 15 - Recommended Bonding Practices for Painted Panels
Stud-mounting the Subpanel Stud-mounting a Ground Bus

to the Enclosure Back Wall or Chassis to the Subpanel
Subpanel
Back Wall of Mounting Bracket or
Enclosure Ground Bus
Subpanel Welded Stud
Star Washer
Flat Washer Scrape Paint
Nut
Welded Stud
Nut Flat Washer
Use a wire brush to remove paint from If the mounting bracket is coated with
threads to maximize ground connection. a non-conductive material (anodized
or painted), scrape the material around
Use plated panels or scrape paint on Star Washer the mounting hole.
front of panel.
Bolt-mounting a Ground Bus or Chassis to the Back-panel
Subpanel
Bolt
Tapped Hole
Ground Bus or Nut

Mounting Bracket
Star Washer
Scrape paint on both sides of
panel and use star washers.
Flat Washer Star Washer
Nut
Flat Washer
If the mounting bracket is coated with

a non-conductive material (anodized
Star Washer or painted), scrape the material around
the mounting hole.

Bonding Multiple Subpanels
Bonding multiple subpanels creates a common low impedance exit path for the
high frequency energy inside the cabinet. Subpanels that are not bonded
together do not necessarily share a common low impedance path. This
difference in impedance can affect networks and other devices that span
multiple panels:
• Bond the top and bottom of each subpanel to the cabinet by using
25.4 mm (1.0 in.) by 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) wire braid. As a rule, the wider
and shorter the braid is, the better the bond.
• Scrape the paint from around each fastener to maximize metal-to-metal
contact.
Figure 16 - Multiple Subpanels and Cabinet Recommendations
Wire Braid
25.4 mm (1.0 in.) by
6.35 mm (0.25 in.)
Cabinet ground bus

bonded to the subpanel.
Wire Braid
25.4 mm (1.0 in.) by
Paint removed 6.35 mm (0.25 in.)
from cabinet.

Establishing Noise Zones
Observe these guidelines when routing cables used in the Kinetix 5500 system:
• The clean zone (C) is right of the drive system and includes the digital
inputs wiring and Ethernet cable (gray wireway).
• The dirty zone (D) is above and below the drive system (black wireways)
and includes the circuit breakers, 24V DC power supply, safety, and
motor cables.
• The very dirty zone (VD) is limited to where the AC line (EMC) filter
VAC output jumpers over to the drive (or first drive in multi-axis
systems). Shielded cable is required only if the very dirty cables enter a
wireway.
Figure 17 - Noise Zones

Dirty Wireway Clean Wireway
D D Very Dirty Filter/AC Input Connections

Segregated (not in wireway)
C
D (1)
(1)
VD
24V DC 24V Input Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System

Power Supply
Circuit Safety Cable

Breakers
(2198-Hxxx-ERS drives only)
AC Line Filter
(required for CE)
(1)
C
D
Single Motor Cables (2) Module Status

Route single motor cables Route registration and communication
in shielded cable. signals in shielded cables.
(1) When space to the right of the drive does not permit 150 mm (6.0 in.) segregation, use a grounded steel shield instead. For
examples, refer to the System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001.
(2) When 2198-H2DCK converter kit is used, feedback cable routes in the clean wireway.

Cable Categories for Kinetix 5500 Systems
These tables indicate the zoning requirements of cables connecting to the

Kinetix 5500 drive components.
Table 12 - Kinetix 5500 Drive

Zone Method
Wire/Cable Connector Very Ferrite Shielded
Dirty Clean
Dirty Sleeve Cable
L1, L2, L3 (shielded cable) X X
IPD
L1, L2, L3 (unshielded cable) X
DC-/DC+ (DC bus) DC Bus-bar only, no wiring connector.
DC+/SH (shunt) RC X
U, V, W (motor power) MP X X
Motor feedback (1) MF X X
Motor brake BC X X
24V DC CP X
Safety enable for safe torque-off (hardwired) (2) STO X
Registration input, greater than 30 m (98.4 ft) X X
IOD
Registration input, less than 30 m (98.4 ft) X
PORT1
Ethernet X X
PORT2
(1) When the 2198-H2DCK converter kit is used, the feedback cable routes in the clean wireway.
(2) STO connector applies to only 2198-Hxxx-ERS (hardwired) servo drives.
Table 13 - Capacitor Module

Zone Method
Wire/Cable Connector Very Ferrite Shielded
Dirty Clean
Dirty Sleeve Cable
DC-/DC+ (DC bus) DC Bus-bar only, no wiring connector.
24V DC CP Bus-bar only, no wiring connector.
Module status MS X

Noise Reduction Guidelines for Drive Accessories
Refer to this section when mounting an AC (EMC) line filter or external

passive-shunt resistor for guidelines designed to reduce system failures caused
by excessive electrical noise.
AC Line Filters
Observe these guidelines when mounting your AC (EMC) line filter (refer to
the figure on page 41 for an example):
• Mount the AC line filter on the same panel as the Kinetix 5500 drive
and as close to the drive as possible.
• Good HF bonding to the panel is critical. For painted panels, refer to
the examples on page 39.
• Segregate input and output wiring as far as possible.
IMPORTANT CE test certification applies to only the AC line filter used with a single drive
or the line filter used in multi-axis drive configurations. Sharing a line filter
with more than one multi-axis drive configuration can perform
satisfactorily, but the customer takes legal responsibility.

External Passive Shunt Resistor
Observe these guidelines when mounting your Bulletin 2097 external

passive-shunt resistor outside of the enclosure:
• Mount shunt resistor and wiring in the very dirty zone or in an external
shielded enclosure.
• Mount resistors in a shielded and ventilated enclosure outside of the
cabinet.
• Keep unshielded wiring as short as possible. Keep shunt wiring as flat to
the cabinet as possible.
Figure 18 - External Shunt Resistor Outside the Enclosure
Customer-supplied
Metal Enclosure
150 mm (6.0 in.)
clearance (min) on all four
Shunt Power Wiring Methods:
sides of the shunt resistor.
Twisted pair in conduit (1st choice).
Shielded twisted pair (2nd choice).
Metal Conduit (where
Twisted pair, two twists per foot (min) (3rd choice).
required by local code)
Dirty Wireway Enclosure Clean Wireway

D D
C
D Very Dirty Connections Segregated
(not in wireway)
VD VD Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System

24V DC
Power Supply
Safety Cable No sensitive

(2198-Hxxx-ERS drives only) equipment within
Circuit 150 mm (6.0 in.).
Breaker
AC Line Filter
(required for CE)
Ethernet and I/O Cables
Single Motor Cable Module Status


When mounting your Bulletin 2097 passive-shunt resistor inside the enclosure,
follow these additional guidelines:
• Mount metal-clad modules anywhere in the dirty zone, but as close to
the Kinetix 5500 drive as possible.
• Route shunt power wires with other very dirty wires.
• Keep unshielded wiring as short as possible. Keep shunt wiring as flat to
the cabinet as possible.
• Separate shunt power cables from other sensitive, low voltage signal
cables.
Figure 19 - External Shunt Resistor Inside the Enclosure
Dirty Wireway Enclosure Clean Wireway
150 mm (6.0 in.) Shunt Power Wiring Methods:

clearance (min) on all four Twisted pair in conduit (1st choice).
D D
sides of the shunt resistor. Shielded twisted pair (2nd choice).
Twisted pair, two twists per foot (min) (3rd choice). C
D Very Dirty Connections Segregated
(not in wireway)
24V DC VD VD Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System

Power Supply
Safety Cable No sensitive

(2198-Hxxx-ERS drives only) equipment within
Circuit 150 mm (6.0 in.).
Breaker
AC Line Filter
(required for CE)
Ethernet and I/O Cables
Single Motor Cable Module Status


Notes:

Chapter 3
Mount the Kinetix 5500 Drive System
This chapter provides the system installation procedures for mounting your
Kinetix 5500 drives to the system panel.
Topic Page
Determine Mounting Order 48
Drill-hole Patterns 51
Mount Your Kinetix 5500 Drive 58
This procedure assumes you have prepared your panel and understand how to
bond your system. For installation instructions regarding equipment and
accessories not included here, refer to the instructions that came with those
products.
SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid hazard of electrical shock, perform all mounting

and wiring of the Kinetix 5500 drives prior to applying power. Once power is
applied, connector terminals can have voltage present even when not in use.
can become lodged in the circuitry and result in damage to the components.

Chapter 3 Mount the Kinetix 5500 Drive System
Determine Mounting Order Mount drives in order (left to right) according to power rating (highest to
lowest) starting with the highest power rating. If power rating is unknown,
position drives (highest to lowest) from left to right based on amp rating.
Zero-stack Tab and Cutout
Engaging the zero-stack tab and cutout from drive-to-drive makes efficient use
of panel space for installations with multiple drives.
IMPORTANT Engaging the zero-stack tab and cutout from drive-to-drive is required for
shared-bus multi-axis drive systems. This is done to make sure the drive
connectors are spaced properly to accept the shared-bus connection
system.
Figure 20 - Zero-stack Tab and Cutout Example

Zero-stack Tab and Cutout Engaged
2198-Hxxx-ERSx Drives
(front view)
For the zero-stack feature to engage properly (when more than one frame size
exists in the drive system) frame 3 drives must mount left of frame 1 or 2 drives,
and frame 2 drives must mount left of frame 1 drives.
Capacitor modules can mount to the right of any frame size, but are always
rightmost in any drive configuration.
IMPORTANT Mount drives in descending order, left to right, according to frame size
with capacitor modules always mounted on the far right.
Figure 21 - Shared-bus Connection System Example
Shared-bus Connection System

2198-Hxxx-ERSx Drive System (required in shared-bus configurations)
(front view)

Frame 1 (optional component)
Drives
Frame 2
Frame 3 Drives
Drive

Mount the Kinetix 5500 Drive System Chapter 3
Shared-bus Connection System
The shared-bus connection system is used to extend the mains AC input, 24V
control input, and the DC bus power from drive-to-drive in shared-bus multi-
axis configurations.
IMPORTANT When the shared-bus connection system is used, the zero-stack tab and
cutout must be engaged between adjacent drives.
The connection system is comprised of three components:

• Input wiring connectors that plug into the leftmost drive and receive
input wiring for mains AC and 24V DC.
• AC bus, DC bus, and 24V DC T-connectors that plug into the drives
downstream from the first where AC, DC, and/or 24V control power is
shared. DC bus T-connectors also plug into the first drive where DC
bus power is shared.
• Bus bars that connect between drives to extend the mains AC bus, DC
bus, and 24V DC control power from drive-to-drive.
Figure 22 - Connection System Example
Bus-bar Connectors (2)

Input Wiring (AC bus-bars shown)
(AC input wiring is shown)
Input Wiring Connector (1) AC T-connectors

(mains AC input shown)
DC Bus T-connector (3)
Zero-stack Tab
DC Bus Connector Latch
and Cutout Engaged
2198-Hxxx-ERSx Drive System (top view)

Frame 2 drives are shown.
Drive with largest amp rating must be
leftmost drive.
(1) Due to the higher amp rating of frame 3 drives, input wiring connectors for frame 3 drives (catalog number 2198-H070-ADP-IN)
are slightly larger than connectors for frame 1 and 2 drives (catalog number 2198-H040-ADP-IN).
(2) Due to the extra width of frame 3 drives, bus-bar connectors between frame 3 drives are slightly longer (85 mm) than
connectors between frame 3, frame 2, and frame 1 drives (55 mm).
(3) DC bus T-connectors latch on both sides when inserted into the drive. To remove the DC bus T-connector, at least one latch must
be pried away with a non-conductive probe.
The three components assemble from left to right across the drive system.
1. Attach wiring to input wiring connectors.

2. Insert input wiring connectors and T-connectors into the appropriate
drive connectors.
3. Insert bus-bars to connect between wiring connectors and T-connectors.

Single-axis Configurations
The following restrictions exist for standalone (single-axis) configurations:

• Standalone (single-axis) drives can be mounted to the panel individually
or by using the zero-stack tab and cutout (refer to Figure 22 on page 49)
• The shared-bus connection system does not apply and must not be used
For a single-axis example configuration, refer to Typical Kinetix 5500

Standalone Installation on page 17.
Multi-axis Configurations
Each multi-axis configuration has restrictions that apply:
• The shared-bus connection system must be used. Do not attach discrete
wires from drive-to-drive.
• The maximum number of drives in Shared AC bus power-sharing
groups cannot exceed 5.
• The maximum number of drives in any other bus power-sharing group
cannot exceed 8.
For a multi-axis example configuration, refer to Typical Shared AC/DC Bus

Hybrid Installations on page 21.

Drill-hole Patterns Hole patterns for drives mounted in zero-stack or shared-bus configuration are
provided for mounting your drives to the panel. Drives with the highest power
rating are always mounted to the left of any drive with a lower power rating in
shared-bus configurations:
• Frame 1 drives can be followed by only another frame 1 drive.
• Frame 2 drives can be followed by frame 1 drives or another frame 2
drive.
• Frame 3 drives can be followed by frame 1, frame 2, or another frame 3
drive.
• Mount Bulletin 2198 capacitor modules in the rightmost position.
– Capacitor modules have the same hole pattern as frame 2 drives.
– Only Shared DC, Shared AC/DC, and Shared AC/DC, hybrid
configurations are compatible with Bulletin 2198 capacitor modules.
Table 14 - Hole Pattern Overview

Drive Cat. No. Frame Size Frame Size Patterns Page
2198-H003-ERSx Frame 1 As many as eight frame 1 drives
2198-H008-ERSx 53
2198-H015-ERSx As many as 8 frame 2 drives
2198-H025-ERSx Frame 2
2198-H040-ERSx One frame 2 drive followed by as many as seven frame 1 drives 54
As many as 8 frame 3 drives 55
2198-H070-ERSx Frame 3 One frame 3 drive followed by as many as seven frame 1 drives 56
One frame 3 drive followed by as many as seven frame 2 drives 57
Table 15 - Capacitor Module Support

Three-phase Operation
Single Phase
Standalone
Operation
Shared AC/DC Shared AC/DC

Frame Size
Drive Cat. No. Standalone Shared DC Hybrid
Number of capacitor modules connected, max

2198-H003-ERSx (1) 0
1
2198-H008-ERSx (1) 0 2
1
2198-H015-ERSx (1)
2198-H025-ERSx 2 4
3
2198-H040-ERSx N/A
2198-H070-ERSx 3 4
(1) Catalog number 2198-H003-ERS and any drive in standalone single-phase operation is not compatible with the Kinetix 5500
capacitor module.

These hole patterns apply to standalone drives.
Figure 23 - Frame 1, Frame 2, and Frame 3 Standalone Hole Patterns
Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3

8x
Standalone Drive Standalone Drive Standalone Drive ØM4 (#8-32)
193.68 243.84 273.70

(7.6) (9.6) (10.8)
4.51 5.00 34.00

(0.2) (0.2) (1.3)
0
Dimensions are in mm (in.)
0 52.50
(2.1)

Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6 Axis 7 Axis 8
Frame 1
193.68
(7.6) A A A A A A A A
Frame 2
243.84 16x
ØM4 (#8-32) 50.0 (2.0)
(9.6)
50.0 (2.0)
B B B B B B B B
Figure 24 - Frame 1 and Frame 2 Hole Patterns
Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

0
Frame Size Dimension Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6 Axis 7 Axis 8
A 4.51 (0.2) 54.51 (2.1) 104.51 (4.1) 154.51 (6.1) 204.51 (8.1) 254.51 (10.0) 304.51 (12.0) 354.51 (14.0)
1
B 0 50.0 (2.0) 100.0 (3.9) 150.0 (5.9) 200.0 (7.9) 250.0 (9.8) 300.0 (11.8) 350.0 (13.8)
A 5.00 (0.2) 60.0 (2.4) 115.0 (4.5) 170.0 (6.7) 225.0 (8.9) 280.0 (11.0) 335.0 (13.2) 390.0 (15.4)
There is 50 mm (2.0 in.) between mounting holes (A-to-A and B-to-B).
2
B 0 55.0 (2.2) 110.0 (4.3) 165.0 (6.5) 220.0 (8.7) 275.0 (10.8) 330.0 (13.0) 385.0 (15.2)
These hole patterns apply when all drives in the system are frame 1 or frame 2.
53
Chapter 3
This hole pattern applies when transitioning from frame 2 drives to frame 1
drives. To mount additional frame 1 drives to the right of Axis 2 in this figure,
refer to the frame 1 hole pattern in Figure 24.
Figure 25 - Frame 2 to Frame 1 Hole Pattern

Axis 1 Axis 2 4x
(frame 2) (frame 1) ØM4 (#8-32)
243.84 243.83
(9.6) (9.6)
5.00 57.00
(0.2) (2.2)
50.15
(2.0)
0 52.50
(2.1)

Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Axis 5 Axis 6 Axis 7 Axis 8
273.70
(10.8)
34.00 119.20 204.40 289.60 374.80 460.0 545.20 630.40

(1.3) (4.7) (8.0) (11.4) (14.8) (18.1) (21.5) (24.8)
32x 85.20 (3.4)

ØM4 (#8-32)
Figure 26 - Frame 3 Hole Pattern
Dimensions are in
mm (in.)

85.20 (3.4) 85.20 (3.4)
is 85.20 mm (3.4 in.) between mounting holes, as shown.
0
0 52.50 85.20 137.70 170.40 222.90 255.60 308.10 340.80 393.30 426.0 478.50 511.20 563.70 596.40 648.90
(2.1) (3.4) (5.4) (6.7) (8.8) (10.1) (12.1) (13.4) (15.5) (16.8) (18.8) (20.1) (22.2) (23.5) (25.5)
This hole pattern applies when all drives in the system are frame 3 drives. There
55
Chapter 3

Axis 1 Axis 2 6x
(frame 3) (frame 1) ØM4 (#8-32)
273.70
(10.8) 272.23
(10.7)
34.00 97.20
(1.3) (3.8)
78.55
(3.1)
0 52.50 92.70
(2.1) (3.7)


Axis 1 Axis 2
6x
(frame 3) (frame 2)
ØM4 (#8-32)
273.70
(10.8) 272.24
(10.7)
34.00 100.00
(1.3) (3.9)
28.40
(1.1)
0 52.50 95.00
(2.1) (3.7)

Mount Your Kinetix 5500 This procedure assumes you have prepared your panel and understand how to
bond your system. For installation instructions regarding other equipment and
Drive accessories, refer to the instructions that came with those products.
Follow these steps to mount your Kinetix 5500 drives to the panel.
1. Lay out the hole pattern for each Kinetix 5500 drive in the enclosure.
Refer to Establishing Noise Zones on page 41 for panel layout
recommendations.
IMPORTANT To improve the bond between the Kinetix 5500 drive and subpanel,
construct your subpanel out of zinc plated (paint-free) steel.
2. Drill holes in the panel for mounting your drive system.

Hole patterns, by frame size, are shown in Drill-hole Patterns beginning
on page 51.
3. Loosely attach the mounting hardware to the panel.
The recommended mounting hardware is M4 (#8-32) steel bolts.
Observe bonding techniques as described in Bonding Modules on
page 38.
4. Attach the leftmost drive to the cabinet panel.
2
1 Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives
(frame 1 drives shown)
Top Screws
(bottom screws not shown)
Zero-stack Tab
and Cutout Engaged
5. Attach additional drives (if any) just to the right of the previous drive by
using the same method, but also making sure the zero-stack tabs and
cutouts are engaged.
Zero-stack mounting is required based on configuration, refer to the
Zero-stack Tab and Cutout Example on page 48.
6. Tighten all mounting fasteners.
Apply 2.0 N•m (17.7 lb•in) maximum torque to each fastener.

Chapter 4
Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
This chapter illustrates drive connectors and indicators, including connector

pinouts, and provides descriptions for Kinetix 5500 drive features.
Topic Page
Kinetix 5500 Connector Data 60
Understanding Control Signal Specifications 64
Feedback Specifications 68
Safe Torque-off Safety Features 69

Chapter 4 Connector Data and Feature Descriptions
Kinetix 5500 Connector Data Use these illustrations to identify the connectors and indicators for the
Kinetix 5500 servo drives.
Figure 29 - Kinetix 5500 Drive Features and Indicators
7 7
2
Kinetix 5500 Drive, Front View 8 17
9
1
(2198-H003-ERSx drive is shown)

Kinetix 5500, Top View
10 (2198-H003-ERS drive is shown)
11
6 L3 Shared-bus AC Input
18 Wiring Connector
L2
5 12 L1
13
U +
4 V –
19
14
W
2
20
2 Shared-bus 24V Input
3 1 1
Wiring Connector
2
1 15
Protective
21 Knock-out
2 Kinetix 5500, Top View
(2198-Hxxx-ERS2 drives)
1
16
Item Description Item Description Item Description

1 Motor cable shield clamp 8 Module status indicator 15 Motor brake (BC) connector
(1)
Converter kit mounting hole
2 (under cover) 9 Network status indicator 16 Ground terminal
3 Motor feedback (MF) connector 10 LCD display 17 Shunt resistor (RC) connector
4 Digital inputs (IOD) connector 11 Navigation pushbuttons 18 AC mains input power (IPD) connector
5 Ethernet (PORT1) RJ45 connector 12 Link speed status indicators 19 DC bus (DC) connector (under cover) (2)
6 Ethernet (PORT2) RJ45 connector 13 Link/Activity status indicators 20 24V control input power (CP) connector
Safe torque-off (STO) connector (3)
7 Zero-stack mounting tab/cutout 14 Motor power (MP) connector 21 (does not apply to 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 drives)
(1) Protective knock-out covers the 2198-H2DCK Hiperface-to-DSL feedback converter kit mounting hole. Remove knock-out for use with the converter kit.
(2) DC bus connector ships with protective knock-out cover that can be removed for use in shared-bus configurations.
(3) Protective knock-out cover is removed on 2198-Hxxx-ERS (hardwired STO) drives.

Connector Data and Feature Descriptions Chapter 4
Safe Torque-off Connector Pinout
For the hardwired safe torque-off (STO) connector pinouts, feature

descriptions, and wiring information, refer to Chapter 9 beginning on
page 171.
Input Power Connector Pinouts

Table 16 - Mains Input Power Connector
IPD Pin Description Signal
Chassis ground
L3 L3
L2 Three-phase input power L2
L1 L1
Table 17 - 24V Input Power Connector

CP Pin Description Signal
1 24V power supply, customer supplied 24V+
2 24V common 24V-
DC Bus and Shunt Resistor Connector Pinouts

Table 18 - DC Bus Power Connector
DC Pin Description Signal
1 DC-
DC bus connections
2 DC+
Table 19 - Shunt Resistor Connector

RC Pin Description Signal
1 DC+
Shunt connections (frames 2 and 3)
2 SH
1 SH
Shunt connections (frame 1)
2 DC+

Digital Inputs Connector Pinout
The Kinetix 5500 drive has two configurable digital inputs and 5 configurable
functions to choose from in the Logix Designer application. Digital input 1
can be configured as a dual-function (home/registration) input.
Table 20 - Digital Inputs Pinouts

IOD Pin Description Signal
1 24V current-sinking fast input #1. This is a dual-function input. IN1 (1)
2 I/O common for customer-supplied 24V supply. COM
3 24V current-sinking fast input #2. IN2
4 I/O cable shield termination point. SHLD
(1) This signal has dual-functionality. You can use IN1 (IOD-1) as Registration 1 or Home input when Home/Registration 1 is
configured.
Table 21 - Configurable Functions

Default Configuration (1) Description
Unassigned
Home
Registration 1
Digital input1= Home/Registration 1 Registration 2
Digital input2 = Registration 2
Positive overtravel
Negative overtravel
Home/Registration 1
(1) Studio 5000 Logix Designer, version 27 or later, is required to change from the default configuration.
Figure 30 - Pin Orientation for 4-pin Digital Inputs (IOD) Connector
Pin 1 IN1
COM
IN2
SHLD

Ethernet Communication Connector Pinout

Pin Description Signal
1 Transmit+ TD+
2 Transmit- TD-
3 Receive+ RD+
4 Reserved –
5 Reserved –
6 Receive- RD-
7 Reserved –
8 Reserved –
Figure 31 - Pin Orientation for 8-pin Ethernet PORT1 and PORT2 Connectors
1 8
Motor Power, Brake, and Feedback Connector Pinouts

Table 22 - Motor Power Connector
MP Pin Description Signal Color

U U Brown
V Three-phase motor power V Black
W W Blue
Chassis ground Green
ATTENTION: To avoid damage to the Kinetix 5500 DC-bus power supply and
inverter, make sure the motor power signals are wired correctly. Refer to
Figure 49 on page 86 for connector wiring examples.
IMPORTANT Drive-to-motor power cables must not exceed 50 m (164 ft).

System performance was tested at this cable length. These limitations also
apply when meeting CE requirements.
Table 23 - Motor Brake Connector

BC Pin Description Signal
1 MBRK+
Motor brake connections
2 MBRK-

Motor Feedback Connector Pinout

MF Pin Description Signal
1 D+
Bidirectional data and power for digital encoder interface
2 D-
Cable shield and grounding plate (internal to 2198-KITCON-DSL connector kit)
termination point
SHIELD SHIELD
Cable shield and shield clamp (internal to 2198-H2DCK converter kit) termination
point
IMPORTANT Drive-to-motor power cables must not exceed 50 m (164 ft).

System performance was tested at these cable length specifications. These
limitations also apply when meeting CE requirements.
Figure 32 - Pin Orientation for 2-pin Motor Feedback (MF) Connector
Pin 1
Pin 2
Understanding Control This section provides a description of the Kinetix 5500 digital inputs, Ethernet
communication, power and relay specifications, encoder feedback
Signal Specifications specifications, and safe torque-off features.
Digital Inputs
Two digital inputs are available for the machine interface on the IOD
connector. Digital inputs require a 24V DC @ 15 mA supply. These are
sinking inputs that require a sourcing device. A common and cable shield
connection is provided on the IOD connector for digital inputs.
The Registration 1 input is capable of dual functionality. You can also use this
as the Home input. Configuration for dual functionality is not needed.
IMPORTANT To improve registration input EMC performance, refer to the System Design
for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001.

Table 24 - Understanding Digital Input Functions

Function Description Default Behavior
An active state indicates to a homing sequence that the referencing
Home/Reg1 sensor has been seen. Typically, a transition of this signal is used to
establish a reference position for the machine axis.
Registration 1 An inactive-to-active transition (also known as a positive transition) or The function is always inactive. You can enable in the Logix
active-to-inactive transition (also known as a negative transition) is Designer application.
Registration 2 used to latch position values for use in registration moves.
Positive overtravel The positive/negative limit switch (normally closed contact) inputs for
Negative overtravel each axis require 24V DC (nominal).
Table 25 - Digital Input Specifications

Attribute Value
Type Active high, single-ended, current sinking (EN 61131-2 Type 1)
Dedicated functions Registration 1, Home, Registration 2, Positive overtravel, Negative overtravel
Input current (with 24V applied) 12 mA, typical
On-state input voltage 15…30V @ 15 mA, max
Off-state input voltage -1.0…5.0V
Pulse reject filtering (registration functions) 12.0 μs
Pulse reject filtering (home input function) debounce filter 20 ms, nom
Propagation delay (registration functions) 0 (delay compensated)
Registration repeatability 700 ns
Windowed registration invalid-to-valid event delay 125 μs, min
Figure 33 - Digital Input Circuitry
IOD-1 or IOD-3
INx
INPUT
24V DC
COM
IOD-2 Kinetix 5500 Drive

Ethernet Communication Specifications
The PORT1 and PORT2 (RJ45) Ethernet connectors are provided for
communication with the Logix5000 controller.
Attribute Value
The drive auto-negotiates speed and duplex modes. These modes can
Communication be forced through the Logix Designer application. 100BASE-TX, full
duplex is recommended for maximum performance.
Cyclic update period 1.0 ms, min
Three-port, cut-through, time correction on IEEE-1588 packets, limited
Embedded switch features filtering, quality of service with four priority levels
Auto MDI/MDIX crossover detection/ Yes
correction
Port-to-port time synchronization 100 ns, max
variation
Cabling CAT5e shielded, 100 m (328 ft) max
Motor Brake Circuit

The brake option is a spring-set holding brake that releases when voltage is
applied to the brake coil in the motor. The customer-supplied 24V power
supply drives the brake output through a solid-state relay. The solid-state brake
driver circuit provides the following:
• Brake current-overload protection
• Brake over-voltage protection
Two connections (BC-1 and BC-2) are required for the motor brake output.
Connections are rated for 2.0 A @ +24V (refer to Figure 34).
Figure 34 - Motor Brake Circuit

INT PWR 24V PWR
Control
Board
MBRK+ (BC-1)
Inductive
ISP772 Energy
Kinetix 5500 Clamp
Servo Drive
MBRK– (BC-2)
24V COM
IMPORTANT Motor parking-brake switching frequency must not exceed

10 cycles/min.
Control of the solid-state relay to release the motor brake is configurable in the
Logix Designer application (refer to Configure PM Motor Closed-loop
Control Axis Properties beginning on page 136). An active signal releases the
motor brake. Turn-on and turn-off delays are specified by the
MechanicalBrakeEngageDelay and MechanicalBrakeReleaseDelay settings.

IMPORTANT Holding brakes that are available on Allen-Bradley rotary motors are
designed to hold a motor shaft at 0 rpm for up to the rated brake-
holding torque, not to stop the rotation of the motor shaft, or be used as
a safety device.
You must command the servo drive to 0 rpm and engage the brake only
after verifying that the motor shaft is at 0 rpm.
These steps provide one method you can use to control a brake.
1. Wire the mechanical brake according to the appropriate interconnect

diagram in Appendix A beginning on page 201.
2. Enter the MechanicalBrakeEngageDelay and Mechanical
BrakeReleaseDelay times in the Logix Designer application.
Refer to Axis Properties>Parameter List. The delay times must be from
the appropriate motor family brake specifications table in the Kinetix
Rotary Motion Specifications Technical Data, publication GMC-
TD001.
3. Use the drive stop-action default setting (Current Decel & Disable).
Refer to Axis Properties>Actions>Stop Action in the Logix Designer
application.
4. Use the motion instruction Motion Axis Stop (MAS) to decelerate the
servo motor to 0 rpm.
5. Use the motion instruction Motion Servo Off (MSF) to engage the
brake and disable drive.
Control Power
The Kinetix 5500 drive requires 24V DC input power for control circuitry.
IMPORTANT SELV and PELV rated power supplies must be used to energize external
safety devices connected to the Kinetix 5500 safety inputs.
The National Electrical Code and local electrical codes take precedence over
the values and methods provided. Implementation of these codes is the
responsibility of the machine builder.
Table 26 - Control Power Input Power Specifications

Attribute Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3
Input voltage 21.6…26.4V DC
Control power AC input current
Nom @ 24V DC (1) 400 mA 800 mA 1.3 A
Inrush, max 2.0 A 3.0 A 3.0 A
(1) Plus BC connector (MBRK+) current.

Feedback Specifications The Kinetix 5500 drive accepts motor feedback signals from Stegmann
Hiperface digital-servo-link (DSL) encoders on the motor feedback (MF)
connector.
TIP Auto-configuration in the Logix Designer application of intelligent absolute,

high-resolution encoders is possible with only Allen-Bradley motors.
The Kinetix 5500 drives support Kinetix VP motors with Stegmann Hiperface
digital-servo-link (DSL) encoders by using the 2-pin (MF) feedback
connector.
Other Allen-Bradley motors and actuators with Stegmann Hiperface single-

turn or multi-turn high-resolution absolute encoders are also accepted, but
only when using drive firmware revision 2.002 or later, and the 2198-H2DCK
Hiperface-to-DSL (series B or later) feedback converter kit for Hiperface-to-
DSL conversion.
You can also use the MF connector for feedback-only applications.
Table 27 - Stegmann Hiperface DSL Specifications

Attribute Value
Protocol Hiperface DSL
Memory support Programmed with Allen-Bradley motor data
Hiperface data communication 9.375 Mbits/s
Absolute Position Feature
The drive’s absolute position feature tracks the position of the motor, within
the multi-turn retention limits, while the drive is powered off. The absolute
position feature is available with only multi-turn encoders.
Table 28 - Absolute Position Designator Examples

Cat. No.
Encoder Type Cat. No. Examples Motor Family
Designator
Stegmann Hiperface (DSL) -P VPL-xxxxxx-P, VPF-xxxxxx-P, VPS-xxxxxx-P Kinetix VP
MPL-B310P-M, MPM-xxxxxx-M, MPF-xxxxxx-M,
-M MPS-xxxxxx-M, MPAR-x3xxxx-M, MPAI-xxxxxxM
Stegmann Hiperface MP-Series
MPL-B230P-V, MPAS-xxxxx1-V05, MPAS-xxxxx2-V20,
-V MPAR-x1xxxx-V, MPAR-x2xxxx-V, MPAI-xxxxxxV
Stegmann Hiperface (magnetic scale) -xDx LDAT-Sxxxxxx-xDx LDAT-Series
Figure 35 - Absolute Position Retention Limits

4096 Turns, Kinetix VP Motors
2048 Turns, MP-Series and LDAT-Series Motors/Actuators
-2048 -1024 +1024 +2048

Position at Power Down

Safe Torque-off Safety Kinetix 5500 servo drives have safe torque-off (STO) capability and can safely
turn off the inverter power transistors in response to a monitored digital input,
Features according to Category 0 Stop behavior.
Servo Drives with Hardwired Safety
2198-Hxxx-ERS (hardwired) servo drives support parallel input terminals for

cascading to adjacent drives over duplex wiring. For applications that do not
require the STO safety function you must install jumper wires to bypass the
safe torque-off feature.
Refer to Chapter 9 on page 171 for the STO connector pinout, installation,
and wiring information.
Servo Drives with Integrated Safety
For 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 (integrated safety) servo drives, the GuardLogix 5570 or

Compact GuardLogix 5570 safety controller issues the STO command via the
EtherNet/IP network and the 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drives execute the
command.
Refer to Chapter 10 on page 179 for integrated safety drive specifications,

configuring motion and safety connections, motion direct commands, and the
STO bypass feature.

Notes:

Chapter 5
Connect the Kinetix 5500 Drive System
This chapter provides procedures for wiring your Kinetix 5500 system
components and making cable connections.
Topic Page
Basic Wiring Requirements 72
Determine the Input Power Configuration 73
Remove the Grounding Screws in Select Power Configurations 76
Grounding the Drive System 78
Wiring Requirements 80
Wiring Guidelines 81
Wiring the Power Connectors 82
Wiring the Digital Input Connectors 84
Wiring Kinetix VP Motors 85
Wiring Other Allen-Bradley Motors and Actuators 90
Capacitor Module Connections 100
External Passive-shunt Resistor Connections 101
Ethernet Cable Connections 102

Chapter 5 Connect the Kinetix 5500 Drive System
Basic Wiring Requirements This section contains basic wiring information for the Kinetix 5500 drives.
can become lodged in the circuitry and result in damage to components.
SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid hazard of electrical shock, perform all mounting

and wiring of the Bulletin 2198 drive modules prior to applying power. Once
power is applied, connector terminals can have voltage present even when
not in use.
IMPORTANT This section contains common PWM servo system wiring configurations,
size, and practices that can be used in a majority of applications. National
Electrical Code, local electrical codes, special operating temperatures, duty
cycles, or system configurations take precedence over the values and
methods provided.
Routing the Power and Signal Cables
Be aware that when you route power and signal wiring on a machine or system,
radiated noise from nearby relays, transformers, and other electronic devices
can be induced into I/O communication, or other sensitive low voltage signals.
This can cause system faults and communication anomalies.
The Bulletin 2090 single motor cable contains the power, brake, and feedback
wires, but is properly shielded to protect the noise-sensitive feedback signals.
Refer to Electrical Noise Reduction on page 38 for examples of routing high

and low voltage cables in wireways. Refer to the System Design for Control of
Electrical Noise Reference Manual, publication GMC-RM001, for more
information.

Connect the Kinetix 5500 Drive System Chapter 5
Determine the Input Power Before wiring input power to your Kinetix 5500 system, you must determine
the type of input power within your facility. The drive is designed to operate in
Configuration both grounded and ungrounded environments.
ATTENTION: Ungrounded, corner-grounded, and impedance-grounded

input power configurations are permitted, but you must remove the ground
screws. Refer to Remove the Grounding Screws in Select Power
Configurations on page 76 for more information.
Grounded Power Configurations

The grounded (WYE) power configuration lets you ground your three-phase
power at a neutral point. This type of grounded power configuration is
preferred.
Figure 36 - Grounded Power Configuration (WYE Secondary)
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive

(top view) 2
1
Transformer (WYE) Secondary

L3
Transformer L3
L2 Three-phase
AC Line Filter L2
L1
Three-phase L1 Circuit
Input VAC Protection
Phase Ground
2
Connect to 1
Bonded Cabinet Ground Ground Stud
Ground Grid or
Power Distribution Ground
The Kinetix 5500 drive has factory-installed grounding screws for grounded
power distribution.
IMPORTANT If you determine that you have grounded power distribution in your plant,
you do not need to remove the grounding screws.
Refer to Power Wiring Examples beginning on page 202 for input power

Figure 37 - Impedance-grounded Power Configuration (WYE Secondary)

(top view) 2
1

L3
Transformer L3
L2 Three-phase
AC Line Filter L2
L1
2
1
Phase Ground Connect to

Ground Grid or
Figure 38 - Corner-grounded Power Configuration (Delta Secondary)

(top view) 2
1
Transformer (Delta) Secondary
Transformer L3 Three-phase L3
AC Line Filter L2
L1
Circuit
Protection
L2
2
1
L1
Connect to
Ground Grid or
IMPORTANT Even though impedance-grounded and corner-grounded power

configurations have a ground connection, treat them as ungrounded
when installing Kinetix 5500 drive systems.

Figure 39 - Grounded Power Configuration (single-phase input)

(top view) 2
1
Transformer L3
L2 Three-phase (1) L3
AC Line Filter L2
L1
Phase Ground
2
Connect to 1
Ground Grid or
(1) Single-phase operation with an AC line filter can increase leakage current.
IMPORTANT Using single-phase input AC power can increase leakage current. To

minimize leakage current remove the AC ground screw (refer to Figure 41
on page 77). Removing the AC ground screw can affect EMC performance.
Ungrounded Power Configurations

The ungrounded power configuration (Figure 40), corner-grounded
(Figure 38), and impedance-grounded (Figure 37) power configurations do
not provide a neutral ground point.
IMPORTANT If you determine that you have ungrounded, corner-grounded, or

impedance-grounded power distribution in your facility, you must remove
the grounding screws in each of your drives that receive input power.
Refer to Remove the Grounding Screws in Select Power Configurations on
page 76 for more information.

Figure 40 - Ungrounded Power Configuration

(top view) 2
1
Transformer (Delta) Secondary
Transformer L3
L3
L2 L2
Three-phase
L1
Input VAC
L1 Circuit
Protection
Chassis Ground
2
Connect to 1
Ground Grid or
ATTENTION: Ungrounded systems do not reference each phase potential to

a power distribution ground. This can result in an unknown potential to earth
ground.
Remove the Grounding Remove the grounding screws when using the following power configurations:
Screws in Select Power • Ungrounded
Configurations • Corner grounded
• Impedance grounded
Removing the screws involves gaining access, opening the sliding door, and
removing the screws.
IMPORTANT If you have grounded-wye power distribution, you do not need to remove
the grounding screws. Go to Grounding the Drive System on page 78.
Removing the grounding screws in multi-axis configurations is best done when

the drive is removed from the panel and placed on its side on a solid surface.
ATTENTION: Because the unit no longer maintains line-to-neutral voltage

protection, the risk of equipment damage exists when you remove the
grounding screws.

ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury, the grounding screws access door

must be kept closed when power is applied. If power was present and then
removed, wait at least 5 minutes for the DC-bus voltage to dissipate and
verify that no DC-bus voltage exists before accessing the grounding screws.
Figure 41 - Removing the Ground Screws
Grounding Screws
Access Door
Kinetix 5500 Drive
(side view)
Lift door to meet

AC Screw arrow at left.
DC Screw
Ground screws installed for grounded power configuration

(screws installed is default setting).
• Remove both screws for ungrounded, corner-grounded, and

impedance-grounded power for three-phase operation
• Remove only the AC screw for single-phase operation
ATTENTION: Risk of equipment damage exists. The drive ground

configuration must be accurately determined. Leave the grounding screws
installed for grounded power configurations (default). Remove the screws
for ungrounded, corner-grounded, and impedance-grounded power
configurations.
Table 29 - Grounding Screw Configurations

Ground Configuration Example Diagram Grounding Screw Configuration Benefits of Correct Configuration
• UL and EMC compliance
• Reduced electrical noise
Grounded (wye) Figure 36 on page 73 Both screws installed (default setting) • Most stable operation
• Reduced voltage stress on components
and motor bearings
• AC fed ungrounded Figure 40 on page 76 • Helps avoid severe equipment damage
• Corner grounded Figure 38 on page 74 Both screws removed when ground faults occurs
• Impedance grounded Figure 37 on page 74 • Reduced leakage current
Minimizes leakage current for single-phase

Single-phase input power Figure 39 on page 75 AC screw removed (1) operation
(1) Removing the AC grounding screw to minimize leakage current in single-phase operation can affect EMC performance.

Grounding the Drive System All equipment and components of a machine or process system must have a
common earth ground point connected to chassis. A grounded system provides
a ground path for protection against electrical shock. Grounding your drives
and panels minimize the shock hazard to personnel and damage to equipment
caused by short circuits, transient overvoltages, and accidental connection of
energized conductors to the equipment chassis.
ATTENTION: The National Electrical Code contains grounding requirements,

conventions, and definitions. Follow all applicable local codes and
regulations to safely ground your system.
For CE grounding requirements, refer to Agency Compliance on page 30.
Ground the System Subpanel

Ground Kinetix 5500 drives and 2198-CAPMOD-1300 capacitor modules to
a bonded cabinet ground bus with a braided ground strap. Keep the braided
ground strap as short as possible for optimum bonding.
Figure 42 - Connecting the Ground Terminal
Kinetix 5500 Kinetix 5500

Servo Drive Servo Drives
(standalone) (shared-bus)
1
2
Braided Ground Straps

12 mm (0.5 in.) by 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
3 Keep straps as short as possible.
4
Item Description
1 Ground screw (green) 2.0 N•m (17.7 lb•in), max
2 Braided ground strap (customer supplied)
3 Ground grid or power distribution ground
4 Bonded cabinet ground bus (customer supplied)
Refer to the System Design for Control of Electrical Noise Reference Manual,
publication GMC-RM001, for more information.

Ground Multiple Subpanels
In this figure, the chassis ground is extended to multiple subpanels.
Figure 43 - Subpanels Connected to a Single Ground Point
Follow NEC and applicable

local codes.
Bonded Ground Bus
Ground Grid or Power

Distribution Ground
High-frequency (HF) bonding is not illustrated. For HF bonding information,

refer to Bonding Multiple Subpanels on page 40.

Wiring Requirements Wires must be copper with 75 °C (167 °F) minimum rating. Phasing of main
AC power is arbitrary and earth ground connection is required for safe and
proper operation.
Refer to Power Wiring Examples on page 202 for interconnect diagrams.
IMPORTANT The National Electrical Code and local electrical codes take precedence
over the values and methods provided.
Table 30 - Power and I/O Wiring Requirements
Kinetix 5500 Drive Connects to Terminals Wire Size Strip Length Torque Value
Description
Cat. No. Pin Signal mm2 (AWG) mm (in.) N•m (lb•in)
2198-H003-ERSx
2198-H008-ERSx
2198-H015-ERSx 1.5…4 8.0 (0.31)
2198-H025-ERSx Mains input power (1) (16…12) 0.5…0.6
L3 L3
2198-H040-ERSx (single-axis IPD connector) L2 L2 (4.4…5.3)
L1 L1
1.5…6
2198-H070-ERSx 10.0 (0.39)
(16…10)
Motor power cable
2198-H003-ERSx depends on motor/
2198-H008-ERSx
U U drive combination. 0.5…0.6
2198-H015-ERSx 7.0 (0.28)
2198-H025-ERSx V V (4.4…5.3)
Motor power W W 0.75…2.5 (4)
2198-H040-ERSx
(18…14)
2.5…6 (4) 0.5…0.8
2198-H070-ERSx 10.0 (0.39)
(14…10) (4.4…7.1)
PELV/SELV 24V power (1) CP-1 24V+ 0.5…2.5
(single-axis CP connector) CP-2 24V- (20…14) 0.22…0.25
7.0 (0.28)
BC-1 MBRK+ (5)
(1.9…2.2)
Brake power N/A
BC-2 MBRK-
DC-1 DC-
DC Bus power N/A (6) N/A (6) N/A (6)
DC-2 DC+
Shunt resistor RC-1 DC+
(frame 2 and 3) RC-2 SH 0.5…4.0 0.5…0.6
8.0 (0.31)
Shunt resistor RC-1 SH (20…12) (4.4…5.3)
2198-xxxx-ERSx
(frame 1) RC-2 DC+
ST0-1 SB+
ST0-2 SB- 0.2…1.5
Safety (2) ST0-3 S1 (24…16) 10.0 (0.39) N/A (7)
ST0-4 SC
ST0-5 S2
IOD-1 IN1 (3)
IOD-2 COM 0.2…1.5
Digital inputs 10.0 (0.39) N/A (7)
IOD-3 IN2 (24…16)
IOD-4 SHLD
(1) The wire size, strip length, and torque specifications shown here apply to the single-axis connector that ships with the drive. For the shared-bus connector specifications, refer to
Table 32 on page 82 (CP connector) and Table 34 on page 84 (IPD connector).
(2) These signals and the safe torque-off (STO) connector apply to only the 2198-Hxxx-ERS drives.
(3) This signal has dual-functionality. You can use IN1 (IOD-1) as registration or Home input.
(4) Building your own cables or using third-party cables is not an option. Use single motor cable catalog number 2090-CSxM1DF-xxAAxx. Refer to the Kinetix Motion Accessories
Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD004, for cable specifications.
(5) Motor brake wires are part of the 2090-CSBM1DF/DG-xxAAxx motor cable.
(6) DC bus connections are always made from drive-to-drive over the bus bar connection system. These terminals do not receive discrete wires.
(7) This connector uses spring tension to hold wires in place.

ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury and/or equipment damage, observe

the following:
• Make sure installation complies with specifications regarding wire types,
conductor sizes, branch circuit protection, and disconnect devices. The
National Electrical Code (NEC) and local codes outline provisions for safely
installing electrical equipment.
• Use motor power connectors for connection purposes only. Do not use them
to turn the unit on and off.
• Ground shielded power cables to prevent potentially high voltages on the
shield.
Wiring Guidelines Use these guidelines as a reference when wiring the power connectors on your
Kinetix 5500 drive.
IMPORTANT For connector locations of the Kinetix 5500 drives, refer to Kinetix 5500
Connector Data on page 60.
When removing insulation from wires and tightening screws to secure the
wires, refer to the table on page 80 for strip lengths and torque values.
IMPORTANT To improve system performance, run wires and cables in the wireways as
established in Establishing Noise Zones on page 41.
Follow these steps when wiring the connectors for your Kinetix 5500 drive.
1. Prepare the wires for attachment to each connector plug by removing

insulation equal to the recommended strip length.
IMPORTANT Use caution not to nick, cut, or otherwise damage strands as you
remove the insulation.
2. Route the cable/wires to your Kinetix 5500 drive.

3. Insert wires into connector plugs.
Refer to connector pinout tables in Chapter 4 or the interconnect
diagrams in Appendix A.
4. Tighten the connector screws.
5. Gently pull on each wire to make sure it does not come out of its
terminal; reinsert and tighten any loose wires.
6. Insert the connector plug into the drive connector.

Wiring the Power Connectors This section provides examples and guidelines to assist you in making
connections to the input power connectors.
Refer to Power Wiring Examples on page 202 for an interconnect diagram.
Wire the 24V Control Power Input Connector

The 24V power (CP) connector requires 24V DC input for the control
circuitry. The single-axis connector plug is included with the drive, shared-bus
connector kits are purchased separately.
Figure 44 - CP Connector Wiring - Single Axis
Kinetix 5500 Drive

Top View
-
24V
+
24V
Fo Only
2
Rem r DC
ove
Bus
24V (CP) Connector Plug
1
Table 31 - Single-axis CP Connector Wiring Specifications

Recommended Strip Length Torque Value
Drive Module Wire Size
CP Pin Signal
Cat. No. mm (in.) N•m (lb•in)
mm2 (AWG)
2198-Hxxx-ERSx CP-1 24V+ 0.5…2.5 0.22…0.25

7.0 (0.28)
2198-CAPMOD-1300 CP-2 24V- (20…14) (1.9…2.2)
Figure 45 - CP Connector Wiring - Shared Bus
V-
24 V+
24
24V DC Input
Wiring Connector
Kinetix 5500 Drives

Top View
Table 32 - Shared-bus CP Connector Wiring Specifications

Recommended
Input Current, max Strip Length Torque Value
Drive Cat. No. CP Pin Signal Wire Size
A rms mm (in.) N•m (lb•in)
mm2 (AWG)
2198-Hxxx-ERSx CP-1 24V+ 1.7…1.8

32 8.4 (8) 11.0 (0.43)
2198-CAPMOD-1300 CP-2 24V- (15.0…15.9)

Wire the Input Power Connector
The input power (IPD) connector requires 195…528V AC (single-phase or

three-phase) for mains input power. The single-axis connector plug is included
with the drive, shared-bus connector kits are purchased separately.
ATTENTION: Make sure the input power connections are correct when
wiring the IPD connector plug or input wiring connector and that the plug/
connector is fully engaged in the drive connector. Incorrect wiring/polarity or
loose wiring can cause explosion or damage to equipment.
Figure 46 - IPD Connector Wiring - Single Axis
Kinetix 5500 Drive

Top View
Input Power (IPD) L3
Fo Only
Rem r DC
ove
Bus
Connector Plug
L2
L1
Table 33 - Single-axis IPD Connector Wiring Specifications

Recommended
Kinetix 5500 Drive Wire Size Strip Length Torque Value
Pin Signal
mm2 (AWG)
2198-H003-ERSx
2198-H008-ERSx 1.5…4
2198-H015-ERSx 8.0 (0.31)
L3 L3 (16…12) 0.5…0.6
2198-H025-ERSx
2198-H040-ERSx L2 L2 (4.4…5.3)
L1 L1
1.5…6
2198-H070-ERSx 10.0 (0.39)
(16…10)

Figure 47 - IPD Connector Wiring - Shared Bus
L 3
L
L1 2
Mains AC Input
Wiring Connector
Kinetix 5500 Drives

Top View
Table 34 - Shared Bus IPD Connector Wiring Specifications
Recommended
Kinetix 5500 Drive Input Current, max Strip Length Torque Value
Pin Signal Wire Size
Cat. No. A rms mm (in.) N•m (lb•in)
mm2 (AWG)
2198-H003-ERSx
2198-H008-ERSx 13.3…3.3
2198-H015-ERSx L3 L3 1.7…1.8
52 (6…12) 11.0 (0.43)
2198-H025-ERSx L2 L2 (15.0…15.9)
2198-H040-ERSx L1 L1
2198-H070-ERSx 13.3 (6)
Wiring the Digital Input This section provides guidelines to assist you in making digital input
connections.
Connectors
Wire the Safe Torque-off Connector
For the hardwired safe torque-off (STO) connector pinouts, feature

descriptions, and wiring information, refer to Chapter 9 beginning on
page 171.

Wire the Digital Inputs Connector
The digital inputs (IOD) connector uses spring tension to hold wires in place.
Figure 48 - IOD Connector Wiring

(front view)
1 IN1
COM Digital Inputs (IOD) Connector Plug
IN2
SHLD
Table 35 - Digital Inputs (IOD) Connector Specifications

Drive Cat. No. DC Pin Signal Wire Size
mm (in.) N•m (lb•in)
mm2 (AWG)
IOD-1 IN1 (1)
2198-Hxxx-ERSx IOD-2 COM 0.2…1.5 10.0 (0.39) N/A (2)
IOD-3 IN2 (24…16)
IOD-4 SHLD
(1) This signal has dual-functionality. You can use IN1 (IOD-1) as registration or Home input.
(2) This connector uses spring tension to hold wires in place.
Wiring Kinetix VP Motors Kinetix 5500 drives and Kinetix VP motor combinations use single motor-
cable technology with motor power, feedback, and brake wires (when
specified) housed in a single cable. Feedback wires are shielded separately and
provide a shield braid for grounding in the connector kit.
IMPORTANT Due to the unique characteristics of single cable technology, designed for
and tested with Kinetix 5500 drives and Kinetix VP motors, you cannot
build your own cables or use third-party cables.
Refer to the Kinetix Motion Accessories Specifications Technical Data,

publication KNX-TD004, for cable specifications.

Table 36 - Single Cable Catalog Numbers

Motor Feedback Kit Motor Cable Cat. No. Motor Cable Cat. No. Feedback Connections
Cat. No. Cat. No. (with brake wires) (without brake wires)
2090-CSBM1DF-xxAAxx (standard) cables Flying-lead feedback conductors. Cables

2090-CSWM1DF-xxAAxx (standard) cables are designed specifically for Kinetix 5500
2090-CSBM1DF-xxAFxx (continuous-flex) cables drives.
VPL-Bxxxx 2198-KITCON-DSL
VPF-Bxxxx (included with Flying-lead feedback conductors. Leads are
VPS-Bxxxxx each servo drive) 2090-CSBM1DG-xxAAxx (standard) cables longer to accommodate Kinetix 5500 or
2090-CSWM1DG-xxAAxx (standard) cables
2090-CSBM1DG-xxAFxx (continuous-flex) cables Kinetix 5700 drives. Extra service loops are
required with Kinetix 5500 drives.
Motor Power Connections

Refer to Kinetix 5500 Drive and Motor/Actuator Wiring Examples on
page 207 for an interconnect diagram.
Figure 49 - MP Connector Wiring

(front view)
U
V Motor Power (MP) Connector Plug
W
Motor Cable
Shield Clamp
ATTENTION: Make sure the motor power connections are correct when
wiring the MP connector plug and that the plug is fully engaged in the
module connector. Incorrect wiring/polarity or loose wiring can cause an
explosion or damage to equipment.
Table 37 - Motor Power (MP) Connector Specifications

Recommended Wire Size (1) Strip Length Torque Value
Drive Cat. No. Pin Signal/Wire Color
mm2 (AWG) mm (in.) N•m (lb•in)
2198-H003-ERSx Motor power cable depends on
2198-H008-ERSx motor/drive combination.
U U Brown 0.5…0.6
2198-H015-ERSx 8.0 (0.31)
V V Black (4.4…5.3)
2198-H025-ERSx 0.75…2.5
2198-H040-ERSx W W Blue (18…14) max
Green/Yellow
2.5…6 0.5…0.8
2198-H070-ERSx 10.0 (0.39)
(14…10) max (4.4…7.1)
(1) Building your own cables or using third-party cables is not an option. Use 2090-CSxM1DF/DG single motor cables. Refer to the Kinetix Motion Accessories
Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD004, for cable specifications.

Motor Brake Connections

Figure 50 - BC Connector Wiring

(front view)
2 MBRK- Motor Brake (BC) Connector Plug

1 MBRK+
Motor Cable
Shield Clamp
Table 38 - Motor Brake (BC) Connector Specifications

Recommended (1) Strip Length Torque Value
Signal/ Wire Size
Drive Cat. No. Pin Wire Color mm (in.) N•m (lb•in)
(AWG)
BC-1 MBRK+/Black 0.22…0.25
2198-Hxxx-ERSx N/A 7.0 (0.28)
BC-2 MBRK-/White (1.9…2.2)
(1) Motor brake wires are part of the 2090-CSBM1DF/DG motor cable.

Motor Feedback Connections
Single motor-cable feedback connections are made by using the 2198-

KITCON-DSL feedback connector kit (included with each servo drive).
• 2090-CSxM1DF cables have flying-lead conductors designed
specifically for Kinetix 5500 servo drives.
• 2090-CSxM1DG cables also have flying-lead feedback conductors.
Leads are longer than 2090-CSxM1DF cables to accommodate Kinetix
5500 or Kinetix 5700 servo drives. Because the leads are longer, extra
service loops are required with Kinetix 5500 drives.
IMPORTANT When using the 2198-KITCON-DSL feedback connector kit, the ambient
temperature for the Kinetix 5500 drive enclosure is 0…50 °C (32…122 °F).
Figure 51 - MF Connector Wiring

(front view)
Refer to Kinetix 5500 Feedback Connector

Kit Installation Instructions, publication
2198-IN002, for connector kit specifications.
Mounting Screws (2)
Motor Feedback
Connector Kit 2198-KITCON-DSL Cover
Feedback Connector Kit Clamp Screws (2)
Motor Cable Exposed Shield

Shield Clamp Connector
Housing
Feedback Cable
2090-CSBM1DF-18AAxx (EPWR+, EPWR-)
Internal
Motor Cable Grounding Plate
IMPORTANT Cable preparation and positioning that provides a high-frequency bond

between the shield braid and grounding plate is required to optimize
system performance.
Table 39 - Motor Feedback (MF) Connector Specifications
Signal/ Wire Size Strip Length Torque Value

Drive Cat. No. Pin Wire Color AWG mm (in.) N•m (lb•in)
MF-1 D+/Blue
2198-Hxxx-ERSx 22 10.0 (0.39) 0.4 (3.5)
MF-2 D-/White/Blue
IMPORTANT The feedback bundle in 2090-CSxM1DF-18AAxx motor cables (typically used

with frame 1 drives) route around the shield clamp (as shown in Figure 51).
The feedback bundle in 14 and 10 AWG cables (typically used with frame 2
and 3 drives) route with the power and brake wires inside the cable shield.

Apply the Single Motor-cable Shield Clamp
Factory-supplied 2090-Series single motor cables are shielded, and the braided
cable shield must terminate at the drive during installation. A small portion of
the cable jacket has been removed to expose the shield braid. The exposed area
must be clamped (with the clamp provided) at the bottom front of the drive.
SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid hazard of electrical shock, make sure shielded

power cables are grounded according to recommendations.
TIP Cables for Kinetix VP motors (catalog numbers 2090-CBxM1DF-18AAxx) do not

route the feedback bundle under the shield clamp. The same cables with 14 or
10 AWG conductors have the feedback bundle within the cable shield braid.
This procedure assumes you have completed wiring your motor power, brake,
and feedback connectors and are ready to apply the cable shield clamp.
Follow these steps to apply the motor cable shield clamp.
1. Loosen the left-side (retention) clamp screw and remove the right-side
screw.
Figure 52 - 18 AWG Cable Installation
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives,

Frame 1 or 2, Front View
(frame 1 is shown) Motor Power
(MP) Connector
2198-KITCON-DSL
Motor Feedback Motor Brake
Connector Kit (BC) Connector
Exposed shield braid

Motor Cable under clamp.
Shield Clamp
Shield Clamp Screws (2)
Retention Screw 2.0 N•m (17.7 lb•in), max
(loosen, do not remove)
Feedback cable routed 2090-CSBM1DF-18AAxx

around the shield clamp. Single Motor Cable
When the drive/motor combination calls for 18 AWG cable, the

feedback cable routes around the motor cable shield clamp.

Figure 53 - 14 and 10 AWG Cable Installation
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives,

Frame 2 or 3, Front View Motor Power
(frame 2 is shown) (MP) Connector
2198-KITCON-DSL Clamp features apply to all

Motor Feedback Motor Brake frame sizes.
Connector Kit (BC) Connector
Servo Drive
Retention Screw
(loosen, do not remove)
Feedback cable routed
within the shield braid.
Retention Shield Clamp
Screw
Exposed shield braid Clamp Screws
under clamp. 2.0 N•m (17.7 lb•in)
Motor Cable
Shield Clamp Torque clamp screws to
Shield Clamp Screws (2) 2.0 N•m (17.7 lb•in), max
2090-CSBM1DF-14AAxx
Single Motor Cable
When the drive/motor combination calls for 14 or 10 AWG cable, the

feedback cable routes along with the power and brake wiring.
2. Position the exposed portion of the cable shield directly in line with the
clamp.
IMPORTANT Loosen the retention screw, if needed, until you can start threading
both clamp screws with the cable shield under the clamp.
3. Tighten each screw a few turns at a time until the maximum torque
value of 2.0 N•m (17.7 lb•in) is achieved.
4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 for each drive in multi-axis configurations.
Wiring Other Allen-Bradley Kinetix 5500 drives are also compatible with other Allen-Bradley motors and
actuators, however the 2198-H2DCK Hiperface-to-DSL (series B or later)
Motors and Actuators feedback converter kit is required for converting the 15-pin Hiperface
feedback signals to 2-pin DSL feedback signals.
Follow these guidelines when 2090-CPxM7DF (power/brake) cables and

2090-CFBM7DF (feedback) cables are used in a new installation or reused in
an existing installation with Kinetix 5500 servo drives. MP-Series servo motors
and actuators have separate connectors for 2090-CPxM7DF power/brake
cables and 2090-CFBM7DF feedback cables.

IMPORTANT To configure these additional motors and actuators (see Table 41) with
your Kinetix 5500 servo drive, you must have drive firmware 2.002 or
later. Refer to Table 40 to determine if you need to install the Kinetix
5500 Add-on Profile.
Table 40 - AOP Installation Requirement

Drive Firmware Revision Logix Designer Application Version Kinetix 5500 AOP Needed?
21.00 Yes
2.002 or later
21.03 or later (1) No
(1) If you are planning to use drive firmware revision 4.001 or later, see Kinetix 5500/5700 Add-On Profile on page 109.
Install the Kinetix 5500 Add-On Profile
Add-On profiles (AOP) are available for download at the Custom Downloads
Add-On Profiles website: https://download.rockwellautomation.com/esd/
download.aspx?downloadid=addonprofiles
Follow these steps to download the Kinetix 5500 Add-On profile.
1. Login to the Custom Download Add-On Profiles website.

The Custom Download Files dialog box opens.
2. Check AOP for 2198-Hxx CIP Motion Kinetix5500.

3. Click Download Now and accept the user license agreement.
If prompted to install the Download Manager, allow the installation.
4. Click the Add-On Profile icon and follow the download instructions.
5. Extract the AOP zip file and run Setup.

Motor Power and Brake Connections
The motors and actuators in Table 41 have separate power/brake and feedback
cables. The motor power/brake cable attaches to the cable clamp on the drive
and wires to the MP and BC connectors, respectively.
Table 41 - Current Motor Power Cable Compatibility

Motor Power Cat. No. (2) Motor Power Cat. No. (2)
Motor/Actuator Cat. No. (1) (with brake wires) (without brake wires)
MPL-A/B15xxx-xx7xAA, MPL-A/B2xxx-xx7xAA,
MPL-B6xxx-xx7xAA 2090-CPBM7DF-xxAAxx
(standard) or 2090-CPWM7DF-xxAAxx
MPM-A/Bxxxx, MPF-A/Bxxxx, MPS-A/Bxxxx 2090-CPBM7DF-xxAFxx (standard) or
(continuous-flex) 2090-CPWM7DF-xxAFxx
MPAS-A/Bxxxx1-V05SxA, MPAS-A/Bxxxx2-V20SxA (continuous-flex)
MPAI-A/Bxxxx, MPAR-A/B3xxx,
MPAR-A/B1xxx and MPAR-A/B2xxx (series B)
LDAT-Sxxxxxx-xDx N/A
(1) The 2198-H2DCK (series B or later) feedback converter kit is required.
(2) Refer to the Kinetix Motion Accessories Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD004, for cable specifications.
Refer to Motor Power Connections on page 86 and Motor Brake Connections

on page 87 for the MP and BC connector specifications.
Table 42 - Legacy Motor Power Cables

Motor Cable Description Motor Power Cat. No.
Power/brake, threaded 2090-XXNPMF-xxSxx
Standard
Power-only, bayonet 2090-XXNPMP-xxSxx
Power/brake, threaded 2090-CPBM4DF-xxAFxx
Continuous-flex Power-only, threaded 2090-CPWM4DF-xxAFxx
Power-only, bayonet 2090-XXTPMP-xxSxx
Table 43 - Induction Motor Power Cable Specifications

Cable Manufacturer Cable Series Voltage Rating Temperature Rating
Belden 29500-29507
Lapp Group ÖLFEX VFD XL 600V 90 °C (194 °F)
SAB VFD XLPE TR
To use your existing Bulletin 2090 cables with Kinetix 5500 drives, some
preparation is necessary so that the cable shield, conductor, and strip lengths
are correct. Follow these cable preparation guidelines:
• Trim the shield flush so that no strands can short to adjacent terminals.
• Measure the conductor lengths and include a service loop.
• Remove just enough insulation to provide the proper strip length.

Maximum Cable Lengths
The power cable length for Kinetix 5500 drive and MP-Series motor/actuator
combinations is limited to 20 m (65.6 ft); however, you can replace the existing
motor power/brake cable with a 2090-CSBM1DF or 2090-CSBM1DG single
motor cable to extend the length up to 50 m (164 ft).
IMPORTANT The option to replace 2090-CPBM7DF power/brake cables with

2090-CSBM1DF/DG single cables applies to only 18 and 14 AWG single
cables. 2090-CSxM1Dx-10Axxx (10 AWG) cables do not support this 50 m
(164 ft) option.
When replacing your existing motor power/brake cable with a
2090-CSBM1DF/DG single motor cable, only the motor power and brake
conductors are used. Cut off the feedback conductors in the single motor
cable and reuse the existing 2090-Series feedback cable.
Motor Power/Brake Cable Preparation
The 2090-CPBM7DF cable power and brake conductors have the following
dimensions from the factory. If your cable is reused from an existing
application, the actual conductor lengths could be slightly different.
Figure 54 - 2090-CPBM7DF Power/brake Cable Dimensions

102 (4.0)
Dimensions are in mm (in.) Edge of
Heat Shrink
Power Conductors
150 (5.9)
MP-Series Motors
and Actuators Brake
Overall Cable Shield Conductors
Brake Shield (remove)
635 (25)
Power cable preparation on existing 16 and 14 AWG cables is sufficient to

reuse on Kinetix 5500 frame 1 and 2 drives, except for the brake conductors,
which are much longer than required.
However, for frame 3 drives with 14 or 10 AWG cables, the overall length of
the cable preparation area needs to be increased for the motor power
conductors to reach the MP connector and also provide a proper service loop.
Follow these steps to prepare your existing brake conductors and 14 or 10

AWG power cable.
1. Remove a total of 325 mm (12.8 in.) of cable jacket from your existing
cable.
This exposes additional cable shield.
2. Remove all but 63.5 mm (2.5 in.) of the shield.

3. Cover 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) of the shield ends and an equal length of the
conductors with 25 mm (1.0 in.) of electrical tape or heat shrink.
Do the same on the other side of the cable shield. This keeps the shield
ends from fraying and holds the conductors together.
4. Cut the brake conductors back to 163 mm (6.4 in.) and trim the shield
braid at the base of the jacket.
The shield braid covering the brake conductors is not needed.
5. Remove the specified length of insulation from the end of each wire.
This example applies to existing 2090-Series cables and 2090-Series single

motor cables. If you are using a 2090-CSBM1DF/DG single motor cable, you
can remove the shield braid covering the brake conductors.
Figure 55 - Power/brake Cable (14 and 10 AWG)
325 (12.8) Dimensions are in mm (in.)

262 (10.3)
8.0 (0.31) Frame 1 and 2 drives
10.0 (0.39) Frame 3 drives
Electrical Tape
or Heat Shrink Motor Conductors
Brake
25.0 (1.0) Conductors (1)
51.0 (2.0) 155 (6.1) 7.0 (0.28)
221 (8.7)
284 (11.2)
(1) The overall shield braid covering the brake conductors can be removed.
Apply the Motor Power/brake Shield Clamp
The power/brake cable shield attaches to the drive cable clamp. A clamp spacer
is included with the 2198-H2DCK feedback converter kit for cable diameters
that are too small for a tight fit within the drive clamp alone.
• Routing the conductors with service loops provides stress relief to the
motor power and brake conductors.
• Make sure the cable clamp tightens around the cable shield and provides
a good bond between the cable shield and the drive chassis.
IMPORTANT Loosen the retention screw, if needed, until you can start threading
both clamp screws with the cable shield under the clamp.
• Tighten each screw, a few turns at a time, until the maximum torque
value of 2.0 N•m (17.7 lb•in) is achieved.

IMPORTANT If the power/brake cable shield has a loose fit inside the shield clamp,
insert the clamp spacer between the shield clamp and the drive to
reduce the clamp diameter. When the clamp screws are tight, 2.0 N•m
(17.7 lb•in), the result must be a high-frequency bond between the
cable shield and the drive chassis.
Figure 56 - Cable Clamp Attachment
Service Loops
Clamp Compressed Frame 1 Frame 2 Frame 3

Around Shield Servo Drive Servo Drive Servo Drive
(no spacer required) Clamp features apply to all
frame sizes.
Servo Drive
Retention Screw
Clamp Spacer Added (loosen, do not remove)
(small diameter cable)
Clamp Spacer (if needed)
Retention Shield Clamp

Screw
Clamp Screws
2.0 N•m (17.7 lb•in)
Insert the clamp spacer when
the cable diameter is smaller
than the drive clamp alone.

Motor Feedback Connections
The feedback cable attaches to the 2198-H2DCK converter kit and is wired to
the 10-pin connector. Bulletin 2090 feedback cables require preparation to
make sure the shield clamp attaches properly and conductors route smoothly to
the 10-pin connector terminals.
IMPORTANT When using the 2198-H2DCK feedback connector kit and Bulletin 2090
feedback cables listed in Table 44 or Table 45, the ambient temperature
for the Kinetix 5500 drive enclosure is derated to 0…40 °C (32…104 °F).
All of the current and legacy feedback cables listed below are compatible with
the 2198-H2DCK (series B or later) converter kit.
IMPORTANT Only Allen-Bradley motors and actuators with single-turn or multi-turn

high-resolution absolute encoders are compatible.
Table 44 - Motor Feedback Cable Compatibility

Motor/Actuator (1) Feedback Cable
Motor/Actuator Family Cat. No. Cat. No.
MPL-A/B15xxx-V/Ex7xAA
MPL-A/B2xxx-V/Ex7xAA
MPL-A/B3xxx-S/Mx7xAA
MP-Series low-inertia motors MPL-A/B4xxx-S/Mx7xAA
MPL-B6xxx-S/Mx7xAA
MP-Series medium-inertia motors MPM-A/Bxxxx-S/M 2090-CFBM7DF-CEAAxx
2090-CFBM7DD-CEAAxx
MP-Series food-grade motors MPF-A/Bxxxx-S/M 2090-CFBM7DF-CERAxx
(standard) or
MP-Series stainless-steel motors MPS-A/Bxxxxx-S/M 2090-CFBM7DF-CEAFxx
2090-CFBM7DD-CEAFxx
MPAS-A/Bxxxx1-V05SxA 2090-CFBM7DF-CDAFxx
MP-Series integrated linear stages MPAS-A/Bxxxx2-V20SxA (continuous-flex)
MPAR-A/B1xxxx-V and MPAR-A/B2xxxx-V
MP-Series electric cylinders (series B)
MPAR-A/B3xxxx-M
MP-Series heavy-duty electric MPAI-A/BxxxxxM3
cylinders
LDAT-Series linear thrusters LDAT-Sxxxxxx-xDx
(1) The 2198-H2DCK (series B or later) feedback converter kit is required.
Table 45 - Legacy Motor Feedback Cables

Motor Cable Description Feedback Cable Cat. No.
2090-XXNFMF-Sxx
Encoder feedback, threaded 2090-UXNFBMF-Sxx
Standard
2090-UXNFBMP-Sxx
Encoder feedback, bayonet
2090-XXNFMP-Sxx
Encoder feedback, bayonet 2090-XXTFMP-Sxx
Continuous-flex
Encoder feedback, threaded 2090-CFBM4DF-CDAFxx

Figure 57 - 2198-H2DCK Converter Kit Pinout
Strip Length Torque Value

Terminal Signal Wire Color
14 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1 SIN+ Black
10-pin 2 SIN– White/Black
Connector 3 COS+ Red
4 COS– White/Red
5 DATA+ Green 0.22…0.25
5.0 (0.2)
6 ECOM (1)
White/Gray (1.9…2.2)
7 EPWR_9V (2) Orange
10 DATA– White/Green
11 TS+ White/Orange
(2)
14 EPWR_5V Gray
(1) The ECOM and TS- connections are tied together and connect to the cable shield.
(2) The converter kit generates 5V and 9V from a 12V supply coming from the drive. The 5V supply is
used by 5V encoders in 230V motors. The 9V supply is used by 9V encoders in 460V motors.
Motor Feedback Cable Preparation
Follow these steps to prepare feedback cables.
1. Remove 115 mm (4.5 in.) of cable jacket and 103 mm (4.0 in.) of cable
shield.
IMPORTANT This length of wire is needed to provide a service loop for the
longest wires terminated at the 10-pin connector. However, most
wires need to be trimmed shorter, depending on the terminal they
are assigned to.
2. Determine the length for each of the 10 wires and trim as necessary.
3. Remove 5.0 mm (0.2 in.) of insulation from the end of each wire.
Cable Shield 5.0 (0.2)

Cable Jacket
12.0 (0.5) 103 (4.0)

115 (4.5)

Apply the Converter Kit Shield Clamp
Follow these steps to apply the converter kit shield clamp.
1. Apply the shield clamp to the 12 mm (0.5 in.) of exposed cable shield to
achieve a high-frequency bond between the shield braid and clamp.
IMPORTANT Cable preparation and positioning that provides a high-

frequency bond between the shield braid and clamp is required
to optimize system performance.
Apply 0.30 N•m (2.6 lb•in) torque to each screw.

Shield Clamp
2. Route and insert each wire to its assigned terminal.

Include a service loop, as shown in Figure 58, and refer to the connector
pinout in Figure 57.
3. Tighten each terminal screw.
Apply 0.22…0.25 N•m (1.9…2.2 lb•in) torque to each screw.
4. Gently pull on each wire to make sure it does not come out of its
terminal; reinsert and tighten any loose wires.
5. Attach the tie wrap for added stress relief.

Table 46 - 2090-CFBM7DF-CEAxxx Feedback Cables

MPL-B15xxx…MPL-B2xxx-V/Ex4/7xAA MPL-A15xxx…MPL-A2xxx-V/Ex4/7xAA
MPL-B3xxx…MPL-B6xxx-M/Sx7xAA MPL-A3xxx-M/Sx7xAA
MPL-A5xxx-M/Sx7xAA MPL-A4xxx-M/Sx7xAA
MPL-A45xxx-M/Sx7xAA
Rotary Motors MPM-A165xxx…MPM-A215xxx MPM-A115xxx…MPM-A130xxx-M/S
MPM-Bxxxxx-M/S MPF/MPS-A3xx-M/S
MPF-Bxxx-M/S MPF/MPS-A4xx-M/S 2198-H2DCK
MPF-A5xxx-M/S MPF/MPS-A45xx-M/S Converter Kit Pin
MPS-Bxxx-M/S MPS-A5xxx-M/S
MPAS-Bxxxxx-VxxSxA
MPAR-Bxxxx, MPAS-Axxxxx-VxxSxA
Linear Actuators MPAI-Bxxxx MPAR-Axxxx, MPAI-Axxxx
LDAT-Sxxxxxx-xDx
1 Sin+ Sin+ 1
2 Sin- Sin- 2
3 Cos+ Cos+ 3
4 Cos- Cos- 4
5 Data+ Data+ 5
6 Data- Data- 10
9 Reserved EPWR_5V 14
10 ECOM ECOM 6 (1)
11 EPWR_9V Reserved 7
12 ECOM ECOM 6
13 TS+ TS+ 11
(1) The ECOM and TS- connections are tied together and connect to the cable shield.
A mounting bracket is included with the 2198-H2DCK converter kit to secure

the kit to the drive. Install the mounting bracket in the mounting position
specific to the frame size of your drive.
Figure 58 - Wiring the 2198-H2DCK Feedback Converter Kit
Mounting Screws (2)
2
1
10-pin
Mounting Bracket Connector
Service Loops
Frame 1 Mounting Position Tie Wrap for Stress Relief
14 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(catalog numbers 2198-H003 ERSx and Wire Management

and 2198-H008-ERSx)
Clamp Screws (2)
Frame 2 Mounting Position
(catalog numbers 2198-H015-ERSx,
1. Place exposed cable shield
Converter Kit Mounting Hole 2198-H025-ERS, and 2198-H040-ERSx) in the channel.
with Protective Cover Removed 2. Place the shield clamp over
(frame 1 drive example shown) Frame 3 Mounting Position the exposed shield.
(catalog number 2198-H070-ERSx) 3. Tighten screws, torque
0.3 N•m (2.6 lb•in).
Refer to Hiperface to DSL Feedback Converter Kit Installation Instructions, Exposed Shield Aligned
publication 2198-IN006, for converter kit specifications. in the Cable Channel Shield Clamp

Capacitor Module Follow these guidelines when wiring the 2198-CAPMOD-1300 capacitor
module:
Connections
• Wire relay output (MS) connections to the Logix5000 controller
(optional).
• Refer to Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module wiring example on page 203.
• Refer to Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module Status Indicators on page 160
for troubleshooting the module status indicator and relay output.
• Refer to the installation instructions provided with your Bulletin 2198
capacitor module, publication 2198-IN004.
established in Chapter 2. Connections to the DC-bus must be made with the
shared-bus connection system.
Figure 59 - Capacitor Module Features and Indicators
Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module

Top View
3
Item Description
1 Ground screw (green)
4
2 Module status (MS) connector (relay output)
2
1
2 5 3 Module status indicator
4 DC bus (DC) connector (under cover) (1) (2)
5 24V control input power (CP) connector (2)
(1) The DC-bus connector ships with a protective knock-out cover
that can be removed for use in shared-bus configurations.
Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module (2) The shared-bus connector set for the capacitor module, catalog
Front View number 2198-KITCON-CAP1300, is included for connection to the
upstream drive. Replacement kits are also available.
1
Table 47 - Capacitor Module Connector Specifications

Capacitor Module Wire Size
Pin Signal
mm2 (AWG)
MS-1 RELAY+ 0.14…1.5 0.22…0.25
2198-CAPMOD-1300 7.0 (0.28)
MS-2 RELAY- (28…16) (1.9…2.2)

External Passive-shunt Follow these guidelines when wiring your 2097-Rx shunt resistor:
Resistor Connections • Refer to External Passive Shunt Resistor on page 44 for noise zone
considerations.
• Refer to Shunt Resistor Wiring Example on page 206.
• Refer to the installation instructions provided with your Bulletin 2097
shunt resistor, publication 2097-IN002.
established in Chapter 2.
Figure 60 - RC Connector Wiring
Kinetix 5500 Drive

Top View
Fo Only
Rem r DC
ove
Bus
1
Table 48 - Shunt Resistor (RC) Connector Specifications

Drive Cat. No. Pin Signal Wire Size
mm2 (AWG)
2198-H003-ERSx RC-1 SH
2198-H008-ERSx RC-2 DC+
2198-H015-ERSx 0.5…4.0 0.5…0.6
8.0 (0.31)
2198-H025-ERSx RC-1 DC+ (20…12) (4.4…5.3)
2198-H040-ERSx RC-2 SH
2198-H070-ERSx
IMPORTANT You must disconnect the internal shunt wires at the RC connector before
connecting the Bulletin 2097 shunt resistor wires.
Table 49 - Shunt Resistor Selection

Bulletin 2097 Shunt Resistor
Drive Cat. No. Cat. No.
2198-H003-ERSx
2198-H008-ERSx
2097-R7
2198-H015-ERSx
2198-H025-ERSx
2198-H040-ERSx
2097-R6
2198-H070-ERSx

Ethernet Cable Connections This procedure assumes you have your Logix5000 controller and Kinetix 5500
drive modules mounted and are ready to connect the network cables.
The EtherNet/IP network is connected by using the PORT 1 and PORT 2

connectors. Refer to page 60 to locate the Ethernet connectors on your
Kinetix 5500 drive. Refer to the figure below to locate the connectors on your
Logix5000 controller.
Shielded Ethernet cable is required and available in several standard lengths.

Refer to the Kinetix Motion Accessories Specifications Technical Data,
publication KNX-TD004, for more information.
Ethernet cable lengths connecting drive-to-drive, drive-to-controller, or drive-

to-switch must not exceed 100 m (328 ft).
Figure 61 - ControlLogix and CompactLogix Ethernet Port Locations
ControlLogix 5570 Controller with CompactLogix 5370 Controller or

Bulletin 1756 EtherNet/IP Communication Module Compact GuardLogix 5370 Controller
LNK1 LNK2 NET OK
(CompactLogix 5370 controller is shown)
ControlLogix Ethernet Ports

The 1756-EN2T modules have only one port,
2
Front Views 00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
1756-EN2TR and 1756-EN3TR modules have two. 1 2 (Rear)
Logix5585 TM
SAFETY ON
NET
ControlLogix 5580 Controller 0000 LINK Port 1, Front

RUN FORCE SD OK
Port 2, Rear
Bottom View
Front View
1 GB Ethernet Port
These Logix5000 controllers accept linear, ring (DLR), and star network
configurations. Refer to Typical Communication Configurations on page 23
for linear, ring, and star configuration examples.
IMPORTANT When using an external Ethernet switch for routing traffic between the
controller and the drive, switches with IEEE-1588 time synchronization
capabilities (boundary or transparent clock) must be used to make sure
switch delays are compensated.

Chapter 6
Configure and Start the

Kinetix 5500 Drive System
This chapter provides procedures for configuring your Kinetix 5500 drive
system with a Logix5000 controller.
Topic Page
Understanding the Kinetix 5500 Display 104
Configure the Drive 108
Studio 5000 Logix Designer 108
Configure the Logix5000 Controller 110
Configure Feedback-only Axis Properties 126
Configure Induction-motor Frequency-control Axis Properties 127
Configure PM Motor Closed-loop Control Axis Properties 136
Download the Program 139
Apply Power to the Kinetix 5500 Drive 140
Understanding Bus Sharing Group Configuration 141
Test and Tune the Axes 145
TIP Before you begin, make sure you know the catalog number for each
drive component, the Logix module and /or controller, and the servo
motor used in your motion control application.

Chapter 6 Configure and Start the Kinetix 5500 Drive System
Understanding the The Kinetix 5500 drive has two status indicators and an LCD status display.
The indicators and display are used to monitor the system status, set network
Kinetix 5500 Display parameters, and troubleshoot faults. Four navigation buttons are directly below
the display and are used to select items from a soft menu.
Figure 62 - Kinetix 5500 Drive LCD Display and Status Indicators
PRECHARGE
192.168.1.1
DC BUS: 0.3V
Status Indicators (see page 152)
PRECHARAGE
192.168.1.1
DC BUS: 0.3V
Navigation Buttons
Soft Menu
This is the Home screen. The setup selections are PRECHARAGE

tied to the two Setup (left-side) buttons and the menu 192.168.1.1
DC BUS: 0.3V
selections are tied to the two Menu (right-side)
buttons.
Setup Menu
The soft menu provides a changing selection that corresponds to the current
screen. Use the navigation buttons to perform the following.
Press to go back. Pressing enough times results in the Home screen.
Each soft menu item is executed by pressing the Pressing either arrow moves the selection to the next (or previous) item. When changing
navigation button directly below the item, as values, pressing the up arrow increments the highlighted value. Values rollover after
shown in this example. reaching the end of the list.
Press to select values to change, moving from right to left. Values rollover when reaching the
MAIN MENU end of the list.
MODULE INFO
MOTOR INFO Press to select a menu item.
Press to return to the Home screen.
? Press to display the fault help (possible solutions in troubleshooting tables). (1)
(1) Refer to Fault Codes beginning on page 196 to review the troubleshooting tables.

Configure and Start the Kinetix 5500 Drive System Chapter 6
Menu Screens
The menu screens provide information about the drives, motors, diagnostics,
and the fault log. Parameters cannot be updated in the menu screens. Press one
of the menu buttons to access the menu.
You can use the soft menu items and navigation buttons to MAIN MENU
view the information. MODULE INFO
MOTOR INFO
Menu/Sub Menu Attributes Description Example Values

Selections
Drive Info Catalog number 2198-Hxxx-ERSx
Firmware revision FW REV: 1.1.450167
Hardware revision HW REV: 1.1
Serial number SERIAL#: xxxxxxxxxxx
Motor Info Model number MODEL: VPL-B1306F
Serial number SERIAL#: xxxxxxxxxxx
Diagnostics> Bus diagnostics BUS VOLT: 0.0V
Drive Diagnostics
BUS CUR: 0.0A
Converter diagnostics CONV UTIL: 0.7%
CONV TEMP: 31.7C
Inverter diagnostics INV UTIL: 0.0%
INV TEMP: 31.7C
Diagnostics> Motor speed SPEED:0.0 RPM
Motor Diagnostics
Motor current MTR CUR:0.0A RMS
Motor utilization MTR UTIL:0.0%
Motor temperature MTR TEMP:0.00C
Diagnostics> Serial number SERIAL#xxxxxxxxxxx
Encoder Diagnostics
Resolution RESOLUTION: 262144
Number of turns NO OF TURNS: 1
Encoder temperature ENC TEMP:33.7C
Supply voltage SUPP VOLT:11.3V
Link quality The link quality attribute indicates how noisy a communication link is and also indicates if there is a communication LINK QUAL: 100.0%
link already established at the drive end. The LINK QUAL value must always be 100%. Persistent values below 100%
indicates a poor feedback ground connection.
Remote signal strength Similar to Link Quality, RSSI reports the quality of link as seen at the motor end by the encoder. Maintain the RSSI value RSSI: 100.0%
indicator between 80 and 100%. Persistent values below 80% indicates a poor feedback ground connection.
Accumulated position This is an aggregated number of errors in the primary position feedback channel of DSL feedback. POS ERRORS: 1
errors
Channel position errors This is an aggregated number of errors on a secondary communication channel of the DSL feedback. CHNL ERRORS: 5
Fault Log Fault text Fault code as listed in Fault Codes beginning on page 196. FLT S20 - CONV OVERLOAD FL
Fault details The problem as reported in Fault Codes on page 196. The converter thermal model indicates that the
temperature has exceeded the factory set capacity
rating of 110%.
Fault help The Possible Solution as reported in Fault Codes on page 196. • Reduce the number of drives in the same bus group
• Reduce duty-cycle of commanded motion

Setup Screens
The setup screens provide the means of changing drive settings, for example,
the IP address. Press one of the setup buttons to access the setup screens.
You can use the soft menu items and navigation buttons to SETTINGS
view the information and make changes. NETWORK
DISPLAY
Press to validate your changes:

• If the change is invalid, the value doesn’t change. STATIC IP
• If the change is valid, an asterisk appears next to the IP ADDRESS*
SUBNET MASK
changed attribute.
IMPORTANT You must cycle control power to make network configuration changes
persistent. In this example, the IP address was changed. The change
takes affect and the asterisk disappears after control power is cycled.
Display configuration changes take effect immediately.
Table 50 - Navigating the Settings Menu

Settings Menu Selections Sub Menu Selections Attributes Default Description
Network ->Static IP (2) IP address 192.168.1.1 Indicates current IP address
Subnet mask 255.255.255.000 Indicates current subnet mask
Gateway 192.168.001.001 Indicates current gateway
DHCP On Turns DHCP on
Off Turns DHCP off
Display Backlight Timeout 30 sec…NEVER -> 3 min (2) Sets backlight timeout period of the display
(NEVER=no timeout period, the
backlight is always on)
Cyclic Data Select (3) ->DC BUS (2) DC bus voltage
CONV UTIL Converter utilization in percent
CONV TEMP Converter temperature in °C
SHUNT UTIL Shunt utilization in percent
INV UTIL Inverter utilization in percent
INV TEMP Inverter temperature in °C
MOTOR UTIL Motor utilization in percent
SPEED RPM
OUT PWR Output power in watts
OUT FREQ Output frequency in hertz
OUT CUR Output current in amps
Contrast -10…+10 0 Contrast setting of the display
(1)
Safety Reset Ownership Are you sure? Resets safety ownership (reset fails after 30 seconds)
Web Enabled Enables the web server
->Disabled Disables the web server
(1) The Safety menu applies to only 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 drives.
(2) An arrow (->) appears in front of the chosen attribute indicating that this attribute is currently configured. This is also the factory default setting.
(3) The DC bus voltage is one of several cyclic data attributes. You can select any of the Cyclic Data Select attributes to be displayed on the Home screen.

Startup Sequence
On initial powerup, the drive performs a self test. Upon successful completion,
the drive firmware revision is displayed.
Kinetix 55 until Kinetix 5500 is spelled out… Kinetix 5500

then…
SELF-TEST SELF-TEST
FW REV: 1.1.33 FW REV: 1.1.33
75% until the test is complete… 100%
Next, the axis state, the IP address, and the PRECHARAGE <-- Axis State
default cyclic data attribute (in this example 192.168.1.1 <-- IP Address
DC bus voltage) appears. In addition, the DC BUS: 0.3V <-- Cyclic Data Attribute
setup and menu soft keys are displayed.
This is the Home screen.
In this example PRECHARGE is the axis state attribute. Table 51 lists the
other axis states and their descriptions.
Table 51 - Axis States on the Home Screen

Axis State Description
STANDBY The drive is waiting to receive configuration information from the controller.
CONNECTING The drive is trying to establish communication with the EtherNet/IP controller.
CONFIGURING The drive is receiving configuration information from the controller.
SYNCING The drive is waiting for a successful Group Sync service.
STOPPED The drive is fully configured, but the control loops are not enabled.
PRECHARGE The drive is ready for mains input power.
The drive is enabled and checking various conditions before entering the RUNNING or TESTING
STARTING state. For example, the drive checks the Brake Release delay time during the STARTING state.
• The drive is enabled, configured with an active control mode, and actively tracking a
RUNNING command.
• The drive is configured for No Control and is fully operational.
TESTING The drive is actively executing a test procedure, for example, a hookup test.
STOPPING The drive is decelerating to a stop as the result of a disable.
ABORTING The drive is decelerating to a stop as the result of a fault or an abort request.
MAJOR FAULTED The drive is faulted due to an existing or past fault condition.
START INHIBITED The drive has an active condition that inhibits it from being enabled.
SHUTDOWN The drive has been shut down.

Configure the Drive You can include the drive in your Logix Designer application by adding it to a
configured EtherNet/IP module or controller and adding it under the
I/O configuration tree. After setting network parameters, you can view the
drive status information in Studio 5000 software and use it in your Logix
Designer application.
Set the Network Parameters
You must program network parameters by using the LCD display.
1. From the LCD display, select SETUP>NETWORK and choose

between STATIC IP and DHCP.
The default setting is STATIC IP.
2. If STATIC IP, then press to configure the following parameters:
• IP address
• Gateway
• Subnet mask
Settings are stored in nonvolatile memory. IP addressing can also be changed

through the Module Configuration dialog box in RSLinx® software. Changes
to the IP addressing take effect after power is cycled. The drive is factory
programmed to static IP address of 192.168.1.1.
Refer to Setup Screens on page 106 for help setting the network parameters.
Studio 5000 Logix Designer For help using the Studio 5000 Logix Designer application as it applies to
configuring the ControlLogix or CompactLogix controllers, refer to
Additional Resources on page 13.

Kinetix 5500/5700 Add-On Profile
The Logix Designer application, version 28.00 and later, makes possible the
configuration of additional drive features not available in previous versions.
IMPORTANT To configure these additional drive features with your Kinetix 5500 servo
drive, you must have drive firmware 4.001 or later. Refer to Table 52 to
determine if you need to install the Kinetix 5500/5700 Add-on Profile.
Table 52 - AOP Installation Requirement

Drive Firmware Revision Logix Designer Application Version Kinetix 5500/5700 AOP Needed?
26.00 or 27.00 Yes
4.001
28.00 or later No
5.001 or later 26.00 or later Yes
Install the Kinetix 5500/5700 Add-On Profile
Add-On profiles (AOP) are available for download at the Custom Downloads
Add-On Profiles website: https://download.rockwellautomation.com/esd/
download.aspx?downloadid=addonprofiles
Follow these steps to download the Kinetix 5500/5700 Add-On profile.
1. Login to the Custom Download Add-On Profiles website.

The Custom Download Files dialog box opens.
2. Check 2198 CIP Motion Kinetix 5500/5700 AOP revision 5.

3. Click the Download Now icon and accept the user license agreement.
If prompted to install the Download Manager, allow the installation.
4. Click the Add-On Profile icon and follow the download instructions.
5. Extract the AOP zip file and run Setup.

Configure the Logix5000 These procedures assume that you have wired your Kinetix 5500 drive system.
In this example, the GuardLogix 5570 safety controller, ControlLogix 1756-
Controller EN2T communication module, and CompactLogix 5370 controller dialog
boxes are shown.
Follow these steps to configure the controller.
1. Apply power to your controller and open your Logix Designer

application.
2. From the Create menu, choose New Project.

The New Project dialog box appears.
IMPORTANT If you are configuring a 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 (integrated) servo drive in

a safety application, you must use a GuardLogix safety controller.

In this example, the typical dialog boxes for 1756-ENxT EtherNet/IP modules
and CompactLogix 5370 controllers with embedded Ethernet are shown.
Follow these steps to configure your Logix5000 controller.
1. Expand the Logix5000 controller family and select your controller.

2. Type the file Name.
3. Click Next.
The New Project dialog box appears.
4. From the Revision pull-down menu, choose your software revision.

5. Click Finish.
The new controller appears in the Controller Organizer under the
I/O Configuration folder.
Controller Organizer with
CompactLogix 5370 controller.
Controller Organizer with

GuardLogix 5570 controller.
IMPORTANT If your project includes a ControlLogix or GuardLogix controller,

you need to add an Ethernet communication module to your
Bulletin 1756 chassis and configure it for use in your application.
• For ControlLogix or GuardLogix controllers, go to step 6
• For CompactLogix 5370 controllers, go to step 13
Refer to the EtherNet/IP Network Configuration User Manual,
publication, ENET-UM001 for more information.

6. Right-click I/O Configuration in the Controller Organizer and choose

New Module.
The Select Module Type dialog box appears.
7. By using the filters, check Communication and Allen-Bradley, and select

1756-EN2T, 1756-EN2TR, or 1756-EN3TR as appropriate for your
actual hardware configuration.
In this example, the 1756-EN2T module is selected.
8. Click Create.
The New Module dialog box appears.
a. Configure the new module.

b. Type the module Name.
c. Enter the Logix EtherNet/IP module slot (leftmost slot = 0).
d. Select an Ethernet Address option.

In this example, the Private Network address is selected.

e. Enter the address of your EtherNet/IP module.
In this example, the last octet of the address is 1.
f. Click Change in the Module Definition area.
The Module Definition dialog box opens.
9. From the Time Sync Connection pull-down menu, choose Time Sync
and Motion.
IMPORTANT Time Sync functionality is what enables motion control on an

Ethernet network. Without this setting, you won’t be able to run
your motion application.
10. Click OK to close the Module Definition dialog box.

11. Click Yes when prompted to confirm your module definition changes.
12. Click OK to close the New Module dialog box.

Your new 1756-ENxT Ethernet module appears under the I/O
Configuration folder in the Controller Organizer.
13. From the Edit menu, choose Controller Properties.

The Controller Properties dialog box appears.

14. Click the Date/Time tab.
15. Check Enable Time Synchronization.

The motion modules set their clocks to the module you assign as the
Grandmaster.
IMPORTANT Check Enable Time Synchronization for all controllers that

participate in CIP Sync™. The overall CIP Sync network automatically
promotes a Grandmaster clock, unless the priority is set in the
Advanced tab.
16. Click OK.

Configure the Kinetix 5500 Drive
IMPORTANT To configure 2198-Hxxx-ERS (hardwired safety) drives, you must be using

the Logix Designer application, version 21.00 or later.
To configure 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 (integrated safety) drives, you must be using
the Logix Designer application, version 24.00 or later.
Use this table to determine where to begin your drive configuration.

Drive Cat. No. Start Here Page
2198-Hxxx-ERS Configure Drive with Hardwired Safety Connections 115
2198-Hxxx-ERS2 Configure Drive with Integrated Safety Connections 117
Configure Drive with Hardwired Safety Connections
Follow these steps to configure Kinetix 5500 drives with hardwired safety.
1. Below the controller you just created, right-click Ethernet and choose
New Module.
Enter 2198 here to

further limit your search.
2. By using the filters, check Motion and Allen-Bradley, and select your
2198-Hxxx-ERS servo drive as appropriate for your actual hardware
configuration.
3. Click Create.

4. Configure the new drive.

a. Type the drive Name.
b. Select an Ethernet Address option.
c. Enter the address of your 2198-Hxxx-ERS drive.
d. Under Module Definition click Change.
Depending on the Module Definition revision selection, alternate
product features can be selected.
Your 2198-Hxxx-ERS servo drive
appears in the Controller Organizer
under the Ethernet controller in the
6. Click Close to close the Select Module Type dialog box.

7. Jump to Continue Drive Configuration on page 121 to continue with
your drive configuration.

Configure Drive with Integrated Safety Connections
Follow these steps to configure Kinetix 5500 drives with integrated safety.
1. Below the controller you just created, right-click Ethernet and choose
New Module.
2. By using the filters, check Motion and Allen-Bradley, and select your
2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive as appropriate for your actual hardware
configuration.
3. Click Create.
4. Configure the new drive.

a. Type the drive Name.
b. Select an Ethernet Address option.


c. Enter the address of your 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive.
d. Under Module Definition click Change.
The Module Definition dialog box appears.
e. From the Connection pull-down menu, choose the Connection

mode for your motion application.
TIP When ‘Safety’ appears in the Connection mode, integrated safety is

implied.
Table 53 - Module Connection Definitions

Description Description
Connection Mode Controller Needed Drive Cat. No. 2198-Hxxx-ERS Drive Cat. No. 2198-Hxxx-ERS2
ControlLogix 5570 and 5580 Motion is managed by this controller.
Motion only GuardLogix 5570, Only hardwired safe torque-off connections are possible. Safety is managed by another controller that has a
or CompactLogix 5370 Safety-only connection to the drive.
GuardLogix 5570
Motion and Safety N/A Motion and Safety are managed by this controller.
or Compact GuardLogix 5370
GuardLogix 5570 Safety is managed by this controller.

Safety only N/A Motion is managed by another controller that has a
or Compact GuardLogix 5370
Motion-only connection to the drive.
The Safety Network Number (SNN) field populates automatically

when the Connection mode includes an integrated Motion and Safety
or Safety-only connection. For a detailed explanation of the safety
network number, refer to the GuardLogix Controller Systems Safety
Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM099.
5. Click OK to close the Module Definition dialog box.
Your 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo
drive appears in the Controller
Organizer under the Ethernet
controller in the
7. Right-click the drive you just created in the Controller Organizer and
choose Properties.

The Module Properties dialog box appears.

8. Click the Drive Safety tab.
9. From the Restart Type pull-down menu, choose Manual or Automatic

depending on your specific application.
• Manual restart indicates a transition from 0 to 1 on the SO.Reset tag
is required to allow torque after the SO.SafeTorqueOff tag has
transitioned from 0 to 1.
• Automatic restart indicates torque will be allowed only by
transitioning the SO.SafeTorqueOff tag from 0 to 1. The SO.Reset
tag is used only for resetting safety faults.
10. Click Apply.
11. Click the Safety tab.
The connection between the owner and the 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo

drive is based on the following:
• Servo drive catalog number must be 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 (integrated)
• Servo drive safety network number
• GuardLogix slot number
• GuardLogix safety network number
• Path from the GuardLogix controller to the 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 drive
• Configuration signature

If any differences are detected, the connection between the GuardLogix

controller and the 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 drive is lost, and the yellow yield
icon appears in the controller project tree after you download the
program.
12. Click Advanced.
The Advanced Connection Reaction Time Limit Configuration dialog
box appears.
Analyze each safety channel to determine the appropriate settings. The

smallest Input RPI allowed is 6 ms. Selecting small RPI values consumes
network bandwidth and can cause nuisance trips because other devices
cannot get access to the network.
13. Click OK.
For more information about the Advanced Connection Reaction Time Limit
Configuration, refer to the GuardLogix 5570 Controllers User Manual,
publication 1756-UM022.

Continue Drive Configuration
After you’ve established your Kinetix 5500 drive in the Logix Designer
application, the remaining configuration steps are the same regardless of the
drive catalog number.
1. Right-click the 2198-Hxxx-ERSx servo drive you just created and

choose Properties.
The Module Properties dialog box appears.
2. Click the Associated Axes tab.
3. Click New Axis.

The New Tag dialog box appears.
4. Type the axis Name.

AXIS_CIP_DRIVE is the default Data Type.
5. Click Create.

The axis (Axis_1 in this example) appears in the

Controller Organizer under Motion Groups>
Ungrouped Axes and is assigned as Axis 1.
TIP You can configure an axis as Feedback Only. Refer to Configure Feedback-
only Axis Properties on page 126 for more information.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click the Digital Input tab.
8. From the Axis pull-down menu, choose an axis to configure.

9. From the Digital Input pull-down menus, choose a digital input
assignment appropriate for your application. Refer to page 62 and
10. Click Apply.

11. Click the Power tab.
IMPORTANT Single-phase operation is possible only when Module Properties>Power

tab>Bus Configuration is configured as Standalone.
IMPORTANT The Logix Designer application enforces shared-bus configuration rules

for Kinetix 5500 drives, except for shared AC configurations.

12. From the pull-down menus, choose the power options appropriate for
your actual hardware configuration.
ATTENTION: To avoid damage to equipment, make sure the AC input

voltage configured in the Logix Designer application matches the
actual hardware being configured.
Attribute Menu Description

400-480 VAC 324…528 AC rms input voltage
Voltage
200-240 VAC 195…264 AC rms input voltage
Input power phasing. Kinetix 5500 drives with
• Three Phase
AC Input Phasing single-phase operation is limited to 2198-H003-
• Single Phase ERSx, 2198-H008-ERSx, and 2198-H015-ERSx.
Applies to single-axis drives and drives with
Standalone Shared AC input configurations.
Bus Configuration (1) (2) Applies to converter drives with Shared AC/DC
Shared AC/DC and Shared AC/DC Hybrid input configurations.
Applies to inverter drives with Shared DC input
Shared DC (common-bus) configurations.
Standalone Applies to standalone bus configurations.
Bus Sharing Group (3) (2) • Group1
• Group2 Applies to any bus sharing configuration (4).
• Group3…
Disables the internal shunt resistor and external
Disabled
Shunt Regulator Action shunt option.
Shunt Regulator Enables the internal and external shunt options.
Enables the internal shunt (external shunt option
Internal is disabled).
Shunt Regulator Resistor Type
Enables the external shunt (internal shunt
External option is disabled).
• None Selects external shunt option. Only the shunt
External Shunt (5) • 2097-R6 model intended for the drive model is shown.
• 2097-R7
(1) Refer to Chapter 3 for more information on single-axis and multi-axis configurations.
(2) Bus Configuration selection is not applicable to all EtherNet/IP drives.
(3) For more information on bus sharing groups, refer to Understanding Bus Sharing Group Configuration on page 141.
(4) All drives physically connected to the same shared-bus connection system must be part of the same Bus Sharing
Group in the Logix Designer application.
(5) Refer to the Kinetix Servo Drives Specifications Technical Data, publication GMC-TD003, for more information on the
Bulletin 2097 external shunt resistors.
13. Click OK.

14. Repeat step 1 through step 13 for each 2198-Hxxx-ERSx servo drive.

Configure the Motion Group
Follow these steps to configure the motion group.
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click Motion Groups and choose

New Motion Group.
The New Tag dialog box appears.
2. Type the new motion group Name.

3. Click Create.
Your new motion group appears in the Controller
Organizer under the Motion Groups folder.
4. Right-click the new motion group and choose
Properties.
The Motion Group Properties dialog box appears.
5. Click the Axis Assignment tab and move your axes (created earlier) from
Unassigned to Assigned.
6. Click the Attribute tab and edit the default values as appropriate for
your application.
7. Click OK.
Your axis moves to the new motion group.

Configure Feedback-only Follow these steps to configure feedback-only axis properties.

Axis Properties 1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.
2. Select the General category.
The General dialog box appears.
3. From the Axis Configuration pull-down menu, choose Feedback Only.

4. From the Feedback Configuration pull-down menu, choose Master
Feedback.
5. From the Module pull-down menu, choose the drive to associate with
your Feedback Only axis.
The Module Type and Power Structure fields populate with the chosen
6. Click Apply.
7. Select the Master Feedback Category.
The Master Feedback Device Specification appears.
8. From the Type pull-down menu, choose a feedback device type.

9. Review other categories in the Controller Organizer and make changes
as needed for your application.
10. Click OK.

Configure Induction-motor Follow these steps to configure induction-motor axis properties for various
frequency control methods.
Frequency-control Axis
Properties
General and Motor Categories
1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click an axis and choose Properties.

3. From the Axis Configuration pull-down menu, choose Frequency

Control.
4. From the Feedback Configuration pull-down menu, choose No
Feedback.
5. From the Module pull-down menu, choose the drive to associate with
your Frequency Control (induction motor) axis.
The Module Type and Power Structure fields populate with the chosen
6. Click Apply.

7. Select the Motor category.
8. From the Data Source pull-down menu, choose Nameplate Datasheet.

This is the default setting.
9. From the Motor Type pull-down menu, choose Rotary Induction.
10. From the motor nameplate or datasheet, enter the phase-to-phase values
for your motor.
See Motor Category on page 250 for a motor performance datasheet
example.
11. Click Apply.

Basic Volts/Hertz Method
1. Configure the General tab and Motor tab as shown in General and
Motor Categories on page 127.
2. Select the Frequency Control category.
3. From the Frequency Control Method pull-down menu, select Basic
Volts/Hertz.
4. Enter the Basic Volts/Hertz attribute values appropriate for your

application.
Default values are shown.
5. Click Apply.
6. Select the Parameter List category.

The Motion Axis Parameters dialog box appears.
7. From the Parameter Group pull-down menu, choose Frequency

Control.
8. Set the FluxUp, SkipSpeed, and VelocityDroop attributes appropriate
for your application.
See the corresponding section in Appendix D, beginning on page 235,
for information and configuration examples regarding all of these topics.
9. Click OK.

Sensorless Vector Method
3. From the Frequency Control Method pull-down menu, select Sensorless
Vector.

application.
Default values are shown. There is more than one way to enter values. If
attributes are inactive, there are two other ways to make changes.
Method #1
a. Change the Frequency Control Method to Basic Volts/Hertz.
b. Enter new attribute values as needed.
c. Change the Frequency Control Method back to Sensorless Vector.
Method #2
a. Select the Parameter List category.
b. Scroll for MaximumVoltage and MaximumFrequency attributes and
enter new values as needed.
These temporary measures are in affect pending a future software
revision.
5. Click Apply.

7. The Motion Axis Parameters dialog box appears.

Control.
9. Set the FluxUp, SkipSpeed, VelocityDroop, MaximumFrequency, and
MaximumVoltage attributes appropriate for your application.
10. Click Apply.
11. Select the Motor>Analyzer category.

12. The Analyze Motor to Determine Motor Model dialog box opens.
13. Click one of the motor test tabs.

In this example, Calculate Model is chosen. See Motor Tests and
Autotune Procedure on page 252 for information about each of the
tests.
14. Click Start.
15. Click Accept Test Results.
16. Click OK.

Fan/Pump Volts/Hertz Method
3. From the Frequency Control Method pull-down menu, select Fan/
Pump Volts/Hertz.

application.
Default values are shown. There is more than one way to enter values. If
attributes are inactive, there are two other ways to make changes.
Method #1
a. Change the Frequency Control Method to Basic Volts/Hertz.
b. Enter new attribute values as needed.
c. Change the Frequency Control Method back to Fan/Pump Volts/
Hertz
Method #2
a. Select the Parameter List category.
b. Scroll for MaximumVoltage and MaximumFrequency attributes and
enter new values as needed.
These temporary measures are in affect pending a future software
revision.
5. Click Apply.


Control.
8. Set the FluxUp, SkipSpeed, VelocityDroop, RunBoost,
MaximumFrequency, and MaximumVoltage attributes appropriate for
your application.
9. Click OK.

Configure PM Motor Closed- Kinetix 5500 drives accept Hiperface and Hiperface DSL feedback from
permanent magnet (PM) motors when the appropriate feedback connector kit
loop Control Axis Properties is used. Table 54 lists the compatible Allen-Bradley motors and actuators.
Table 54 - Motor Feedback Compatibility

Feedback
Feedback Type Description Connector
Applies to Allen-Bradley Bulletin MPL, MPM, MPF, MPS (-M/S or -V/E) rotary
Hiperface High-resolution motors and Bulletin MPAS (ballscrew), MPAR, MPAI linear actuators, and
LDAT-Series (-xDx) linear thrusters, wired to the 2198-H2DCK converter kit. 2-pin motor
single-turn and feedback (MF)
multi-turn, absolute Applies to Allen-Bradley Bulletin VPL, VPF, VPS rotary motors wired to the
Hiperface DSL 2198-KITCON-DSL connector kit.
IMPORTANT Unprogrammed Smart feedback devices (Hiperface Sin/Cos and Hiperface

DSL) are not supported. Unprogrammed as load or feedback-only feedback
types are supported. Contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation
representative for support options.
Follow these steps to configure permanent-magnet (PM) motor closed-loop

axis properties.

The General and Associated Module dialog box appears.
3. From the General pull-down menus, change configuration settings as

needed for your application.
IMPORTANT Frequency Control is not supported for permanent magnet motors.

4. From the Associated Module>Module pull-down menu, choose your

Kinetix 5500 drive.
The drive catalog number populates the Module Type and Power
Structure fields.
5. Click Apply.
6. Select the Motor category.
The Motor Device Specification dialog box appears.
7. From the Data Source pull-down menu, choose Catalog Number.

8. Click Change Catalog.
The Change Catalog Number dialog box appears.
9. Select the motor catalog number appropriate for your application.

To verify the motor catalog number, refer to the motor name plate.
10. Click OK to close the Change Catalog Number dialog box.
11. Click Apply.
Motor data specific to your motor appears in the Nameplate / Datasheet
- Phase to Phase parameters field.

12. Select the Scaling category and edit the default values as appropriate for
your application.
13. Click Apply, if you make changes.

14. Select the Load category and edit the default values as appropriate for
your application.
15. Click Apply, if you make changes.

16. Select the Actions category.
The Actions to Take Upon Conditions dialog box appears.

From this dialog box, you can program actions and change the action for
exceptions (faults). Refer to Logix5000 Controller and Drive Behavior
on page 162 for more information.
From this dialog box you can set brake engage and release delay times for
servo motors. For recommended motor brake delay times, refer to the
Kinetix Rotary Motion Specifications Technical Data, publication
GMC-TD001.
18. Click OK.
19. Repeat step 1 through step 18 for each servo motor axis.
Download the Program After completing the Logix Designer application and saving the file you must
download your program to the Logix5000 processor.

Apply Power to the This procedure assumes that you have wired and configured your Kinetix 5500
system and your Logix5000 controller.
Kinetix 5500 Drive
SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid hazard of electrical shock, perform all mounting and
wiring of the Bulletin 2198 servo drives prior to applying power. Once power is
applied, connector terminals can have voltage present even when not in use.
Follow these steps to apply power to the Kinetix 5500 system.
1. Disconnect the load to the motor.
ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury or damage to equipment,

disconnect the load to the motor. Make sure each motor is free of all
linkages when initially applying power to the system.
2. Apply 24V DC control power.

The LCD display begins the startup sequence. Refer to Startup
Sequence on page 107. If the startup sequence does not begin, check the
24V control power connections.
3. When the startup sequence completes, verify that the two status
indicators are steady green and the axis state is PRECHARGE.
If the axis state does not reach PRECHARGE and the two status
indicators are not solid green, refer to Kinetix 5500 Drive Status
Indicators on page 159.
IMPORTANT Apply control power before applying three-phase AC power. This makes sure the
shunt is enabled, which can prevent nuisance faults or Bus Overvoltage faults.
4. Apply mains input power and monitor the DC BUS voltage on the
LCD display.
If the DC BUS does not reach the expected voltage level, check the
three-phase input power connections. Also, it can take as many as 1.8
seconds after input power is applied before the drive can accept motion
commands.
5. Verify that the axis state changes to STOPPED.
If the axis state does not change to STOPPED, refer to Fault Codes on
page 152.
Applying Power after Changing Input Voltage Range

This step applies to any drive or multi-axis drive configuration.
ATTENTION: To avoid damage to equipment when the configured input voltage

range of the drive or drives changes from 230V AC to 460V AC or from 460V AC to
230V AC, the bus voltage needs to bleed down below 50V DC before the new
configured input voltage is applied.

Understanding Bus Sharing When configuring Module Properties>Power tab for each Kinetix 5500 servo
drive, you can breakout drives from one or more servo systems into multiple
Group Configuration bus-sharing (power) groups.
A drive that faults in Group 1 does not affect the operation of Group 2, even
though all of the drives in Groups 1 and 2 are in the same Motion group in the
Logix Designer application.
Figure 63 - 25 Bus-sharing Groups Are Possible
IMPORTANT Bus-sharing groups do not apply to drives with a Bus Configuration of

Standalone. When Standalone is configured as the Bus Configuration,
Standalone (dimmed) is also configured as the Bus Sharing Group.
Figure 64 - Standalone Bus Configuration

Bus Sharing Group Example
In this example, twelve axes are needed to support the motion application. All
twelve axes are configured in the same Motion group in the Logix Designer
application.
However, the twelve axes of motion are also configured as two bus-sharing
groups and one standalone drive in Module Properties>Power tab. By creating
two bus-sharing groups, a converter drive that faults in Group 1 only disables
Group 1 drives, and has no effect on the drive operation of Group 2 or the
Standalone drive.
Figure 65 - Bus-sharing Group Example

Logix Designer
CompactLogix 5370 Controller
Application
Logix Designer Application
Module Properties>Power Tab
Three-phase and Group 1 (shared AC/DC hybrid)
24V Input Power Controller Organizer Bus Sharing Group 1
Axis_01
Axis_02
Axis_03
Axis_04
Axis_05
1585J-M8CBJM-x Axis_06
Bus Sharing Group 2

Axis_07
2198-H040-ERSx 2198-H003-ERSx Axis_08
Common-bus (converter) Common-bus (inverter) Axis_09
Leader Drives Follower Drives Axis_10
Axis_11

Three-phase and Group 2 (shared-DC common-bus)
Standalone
24V Input Power Axis_12

Standalone
Three-phase and
24V Input Power
1585J-M8CBJM-x
2198-H040-ERSx 2198-H003-ERSx
Common-bus Leader Drive Common-bus
Follower Drives

Configure Bus-sharing Groups
Group 1 is a shared AC/DC hybrid configuration. The Bus Configuration for

the first two converter drives is Shared AC/DC. The Bus Configuration for
the inverter drives is Shared DC.
ATTENTION: To avoid damage to equipment, all modules physically

connected to the same shared-bus connection system must be part of the
same Bus Sharing Group in the Logix Designer application.
Figure 66 - Group 1 Converter Drives Configuration
Figure 67 - Group 1 Inverter Drives Configuration

Group 2 is a shared DC (common-bus) configuration. The Bus Configuration

for the leader drive is Shared AC/DC. The Bus Configuration for the follower
drives is Shared DC.
Figure 68 - Group 2 Leader Drive Configuration
Figure 69 - Group 2 Follower Drives Configuration
Figure 70 - Standalone Drive Configuration

Test and Tune the Axes This procedure assumes that you have configured your Kinetix 5500 drive,
your Logix5000 controller, and applied power to the system.
IMPORTANT Before proceeding with testing and tuning your axes, verify that the MOD
and NET status indicators are operating as described in Kinetix 5500 Drive
Status Indicators on page 159.
For help using the Logix Designer application as it applies to testing and tuning
your axes with ControlLogix EtherNet/IP modules or CompactLogix 5370
controllers, refer to Additional Resources on page 13.
Test the Axes
Follow these steps to test the axes.
1. Verify the load was removed from each axis.
ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury or damage to equipment, you

must remove the load from each axis as uncontrolled motion can
occur when an axis with an integral motor brake is released during
the test.
2. In your Motion Group folder, right-click an axis and choose Properties.

The Axis Properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Hookup Tests category.
4. In the Test Distance field, enter the desired test distance.

The Position Units are defined in the Axis Properties>Scaling tab.

Table 55 - Hookup Test Definitions
Test Description
Verifies marker detection capability as you manually rotate the motor shaft. The test
completes when the drive either detects the marker or when the motor moves the distance
Marker specified in the Test Distance field. If the marker remains undetected, the test completes
successfully, but if the marker is not detected before the motor moves the full test distance
the test fails. Run this test after running the Motor Feedback and Motor and Feedback tests.
Verifies the commutation offset and commutation polarity of the motor. For Kinetix 5500
Commutation drives, this test applies to only third-party motors. See Commutation Test on page page 269.
Verifies feedback connections are wired correctly as you manually rotate the motor shaft.
The test completes when the drive determines that the motor moved the full distance
Motor Feedback specified in the Test Distance field. Run this test before the Motor and Feedback Test to verify
that the feedback can be read properly.
Verifies motor power and feedback connections are wired correctly as the drive commands
Motor and Feedback the motor to rotate. Because the drive is rotating the motor, this test requires full bus power
to run. Run the Motor Feedback test before running this test to verify that the feedback is
being read correctly.
5. Click the desired test to verify connections.

6. Click Start.
The Logix Designer - Motor and Feedback Test dialog box appears. The
Test State is Executing. TESTING appears on the drive LCD display.
Drive LCD Display
TESTING
192.168.1.1
DC BUS: 218.3V
When the test completes successfully, the Test State changes from
Executing to Passed.
7. Click OK.
This dialog box appears asking if
the direction was correct.
8. Click Yes.
9. Click Accept Test Results.
10. If the test fails, this dialog box
appears.
a. Click OK.
b. Verify the DC bus voltage.
c. Verify unit values entered in the
Scaling category.

d. Verify the motor power and feedback wiring.

e. Return to step 5 and run the test again.
Tune the Axes
Choose the tuning procedure best suited for your motor type.
Motor Type Go directly to
Permanent magnet (PM) Tune Permanent Magnet Motors
Induction Tune Induction Motors on page 149
Tune Permanent Magnet Motors
The load observer feature provides high-performance motion control without

having to manually tune your axis. Using load observer with a default set of
gains can yield high-performance right out of the box. Most of the time, there is
no need to perform an auto-tune procedure or further optimize gain settings.
Follow these steps to configure the drive for high-performance by using the
load observer feature.
1. Verify that the load is connected.

Re-attach the load if it was disconnected for the Hookup Test.
ATTENTION: If the drive has not been enabled before (new

installation), verify that you have safeguards in place to safely
remove power from the drive in the event of an unstable situation
where the drive can produce undesired motion.
2. Click the Autotune tab in the Axis Properties dialog box.

a. From the pull-down menus for Application Type, Loop Response,
and Load Coupling, choose Custom, Medium, and Rigid settings,
respectively.
b. Verify that only the Velocity Feedforward box is checked.

3. Click the Load tab in the Axis Properties dialog box.

a. Check Use Load Ratio.
b. Set the Load Ratio = 0.
4. Click the Observer tab in the Axis Properties dialog box.

a. From the Configuration pull-down menu, choose Load Observer
with Velocity Estimate.
b. Click Apply and click Yes to update all dependent attributes.

The Load Observer Bandwidth and other gains are set automatically.
1 1
1
4 4
K pp K vp K op T bw
0 0 0
K pi K vi K oi
5. Enable the drive for a few seconds with an MSO instruction or motion
direct command, followed by an MSF instruction or motion direct
command, to make sure that no audible squealing noise is present.
IMPORTANT If an audible squealing noise is heard, go to Axis Properties>Load>

Compliance category and set the Torque Notch Filter Frequency field
(Hz) to remove the noise. Refer to Motion System Tuning
Application Techniques, publication MOTION-AT005 (Compensating
for High Frequency Resonances), for information on how to set the
Torque Notch Filter Frequency field.
6. Repeat Test and Tune the Axes for each axis.

Tune Induction Motors
IMPORTANT The Automatic FluxUpControl setting is recommended for best Autotune

results.
Follow these steps to tune the induction motor axes.
1. Verify the load is removed from the axis being tuned.
ATTENTION: To reduce the possibility of unpredictable motor

response, tune your motor with the load removed first, then re-
attach the load and perform the tuning procedure again to provide
an accurate operational response.
2. Select the Autotune category.
3. Type values for Travel Limit and Speed.

In this example, Travel Limit = 50.0 and Speed = 2.0. The actual value
of programmed units depend on your application.
4. From the Direction pull-down menu, choose a setting appropriate for
your application.
Forward Uni-directional is default.
5. Edit other fields as appropriate for your application.
6. Click Start.

The Logix Designer - Autotune dialog box appears. When the test
completes, the Test State changes from Executing to Success.
Tuned values populate the Loop and Load parameter tables. Actual
bandwidth values (Hz) depend on your application and can require
adjustment once motor and load are connected.
7. Click Accept Tuned Values.
8. Click OK to close the Logix Designer - Autotune dialog box.
9. Click OK to close the Axis Properties dialog box.
10. If the test fails, this dialog box appears.
a. Click OK.
b. Make an adjustment to motor velocity.
c. Refer to the controller user manual for more information.
d. Return to step 6 and run the test again.
11. Repeat Test and Tune the Axes for each axis.

Chapter 7
Troubleshoot the Kinetix 5500 Drive System
This chapter provides troubleshooting tables and related information for your
Topic Page
Safety Precautions 151
Interpret Status Indicators 152
General Troubleshooting 160
Logix5000 Controller and Drive Behavior 162
Safety Precautions Observe the following safety precautions when troubleshooting your
Kinetix 5500 servo drive.
ATTENTION: Capacitors on the DC bus can retain hazardous voltages after

input power has been removed. Before working on the drive, measure the DC
bus voltage to verify that it has reached a safe level or wait the full-time
interval as indicated in the warning on the front of the drive. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in severe bodily injury or loss of life.
ATTENTION: Do not attempt to defeat or override the drive fault circuits. You
must determine the cause of a fault and correct it before you attempt to
operate the system. Failure to correct the fault could result in personal injury
and/or damage to equipment as a result of uncontrolled machine operation.
ATTENTION: Provide an earth ground for test equipment (oscilloscope) used

in troubleshooting. Failure to ground the test equipment could result in
personal injury.

Chapter 7 Troubleshoot the Kinetix 5500 Drive System
Interpret Status Indicators Refer to these troubleshooting tables to identify faults, potential causes, and
the appropriate actions to resolve the fault. If the fault persists after attempting
to troubleshoot the system, contact your Rockwell Automation sales
representative for further assistance.
Display Interface
The LCD display provides fault messages and MAIN MENU
troubleshooting information by using the soft menu items DIAGNOSTICS
and navigation buttons. FAULT LOG
Under the Main Menu, select FAULT LOG by using the up/down arrows.
Press to display the list of active fault codes.
Press again to display the fault details (the problem in troubleshooting tables).
? Press to display the fault help (possible solutions in troubleshooting tables).
Refer to Understanding the Kinetix 5500 Display on page 104 for more
information on navigating the LCD display menu.
Fault Codes
The fault code tables are designed to help you determine the source of the fault
or exception. When a fault condition is detected, the drive performs the
appropriate fault action, the fault is displayed, and the fault is added to a
persistent fault log (along with diagnostics data). The earlier faults have
priority to be displayed.
The drive removes the fault text from the display when a Fault Reset service is
sent from the controller and the fault is no longer active. If a fault is still active
following a Fault Reset service, the fault is again posted to the display and
written to the fault log.
However, there is a delay before the fault is posted again. In a Studio 5000
Logix Designer application, this delay results as the AxisFault tag on the drive
axis being cleared until the fault is posted again. During this delay, the
AxisState tag continues to indicate that the axis is faulted. Use the AxisState tag
on the axis object and only to determine if an axis is faulted.
The drive maintains a log of the last 128 faults with time stamps and stores the
fault login persistent memory. However, the fault log cannot be cleared on the
drive.

Troubleshoot the Kinetix 5500 Drive System Chapter 7
Table 56 - Fault Code Summary

Fault Code Type (1) (2) Description
FLT Sxx Standard runtime axis exceptions.
FLT Mxx Manufacturer-specific runtime axis exception.
INIT FLT Sxx
Exceptions that prevent normal operation and occur during the initialization process.
INIT FLT Mxx
Exceptions that can prevent normal operation of the drive module and apply to the
NODE FLTxx entire module.
Exceptions that can prevent normal operation of the drive module, but do not result in
NODE ALARM xx any action other than reporting the alarm to the controller.
INHIBIT Sxx Conditions that prevent normal operation and indicate that the drive module is
INHIBIT Mxx prevented from being enabled.
ALARM Sxx An underlying exception condition that does not result in any action other than
ALARM Mxx reporting the alarm to the controller.
SAFE FLTxx (3) Exception that is generated by a fault condition that is detected in the safety function.
(1) Sxx refers to Standard exceptions.
(2) Mxx refers to Manufacturer-specific exceptions.
(3) For troubleshooting SAFE FLT fault codes, refer to Chapter 9 on page 174 (hardwired safety) or Chapter 10 on page 182
(integrated safety).
TIP Fault codes that are triggered by conditions that fall outside factory-set limits are identified by FL at
the end of the display message. For example, FLT S07 – MTR OVERLOAD FL.
Fault codes that are triggered by conditions that fall outside user-set limits are identified by UL at the
end of the display message. For example, FLT S08 – MTR OVERLOAD UL.
Exception Code on Display Exception Text Problem Possible Solutions

FLT S03 – MTR OVERSPEED FL - 0 Motor Overspeed Motor speed has exceeded 125% of its maximum Check control loop tuning.
Factory Limit Fault speed.
FLT S03 – MTR OVERSPEED FL - 1 The output frequency has exceeded 590 Hz. • Check control loop tuning
• Reduce the velocity command
FLT S04 – MTR OVERSPEED UL Motor Overspeed Motor speed has exceeded motor overspeed user • Check control loop tuning
User Limit Fault limit. • Increase the Motor Overspeed UL attribute value
Not supported on induction motors.
FLT S05 – MTR OVERTEMP FL nn Motor Overtemperature Calculations based on the motor thermistor indicate
Factory Limit Fault that the motor factory temperature limit has been • Operate motor within continuous torque rating
exceeded. • Reduce motor ambient temperature
The nn sub-code is defined as follows: • Add motor cooling
01: Motor Thermostat or Thermistor Available only on Kinetix VP and MP-Series motors. Not supported
on induction motors.
02: Encoder Temperature Sensor
FLT S07 – MTR OVERLOAD FL Motor Thermal Overload The motor thermal model has exceeded its factory set Modify the command profile to reduce speed or increase time.
Factory Limit Fault thermal capacity limit of 110%.
FLT S08 – MTR OVERLOAD UL Motor Thermal Overload The motor thermal model has exceeded the thermal • Modify the command profile
User Limit Fault capacity limit given by Motor Thermal Overload User
Limit. • Increase the Motor Thermal Overload UL attribute value
FLT S09 – MTR PHASE LOSS Motor Phase Loss Torque Prove function detected motor current below a Check motor connections.
limit set by Torque Prove Current Limit.
FLT S10 – INV OVERCURRENT Inverter Overcurrent Fault Inverter current has exceeded the instantaneous • Check motor power cable for shorts
current limit (determined by hardware). • Verify motor windings are not shorted
• Verify motor power wire gauge
• Operate within the continuous power rating
• Modify the command profile to reduce speed or increase time
FLT S11 – INV OVERTEMP FL Inverter Overtemperature The measured inverter temperature has exceeded the • Modify the command profile to reduce speed or increase time
Factory Limit Fault factory set temperature limit. • Reduce drive ambient temperature
• Verify airflow through drive is not obstructed


FLT S13 – INV OVERLOAD FL Inverter Thermal Overload The thermal capacity of the inverter has exceeded the Modify the command profile to reduce speed or increase time.
Factory Limit Fault factory set limit.
FLT S14 – INV OVERLOAD UL Inverter Thermal Overload The thermal capacity of the inverter has exceeded the • Modify the command profile to reduce speed or increase time
User Limit Fault user set limit given by the inverter Thermal Overload
User Limit. • Increase the Inverter Thermal Overload UL attribute value
FLT S15 – CONV OVERCURRENT Converter Overcurrent Fault The measured converter current has exceeded the • Reduce number of shared DC follower drives
factory set current limit. • Reduce number of capacitor modules
FLT S16 – GROUND CURRENT Ground Current The sensing circuitry in the power stage has detected • Check motor power wiring; check power cable for shorts
Factory Limit Fault excessive ground current. • Replace motor if the fault persists
FLT S18 – CONV OVERTEMP FL Converter OverTemp The measured converter temperature has exceeded • Reduce number of shared DC follower drives
Factory Limit Fault the factory set temperature limit. • Modify the command profile to reduce speed or increase time
• Reduce drive ambient temperature
• Verify airflow through drive is not obstructed
FLT S20 – CONV OVERLOAD FL Converter Thermal Overload The converter thermal model indicates that the
Factory Limit Fault temperature has exceeded the factory set capacity • Reduce number of shared DC follower drives
• Reduce duty-cycle of commanded motion
rating of 110%.
FLT S21 – CONV OVERLOAD UL Converter Thermal Overload The converter thermal model indicates that the • Reduce number of shared DC follower drives
User Limit Fault temperature has exceeded the limit given by • Reduce duty-cycle of commanded motion
Converter Thermal Overload User Limit. • Increase the Converter Thermal Overload UL attribute value
FLT S23 – AC PHASE LOSS AC Single Phase Loss Fault A single AC input phase was lost while the drive was Check AC input voltage on all phases.
enabled.
FLT S25 – CONV PRECHARGE Converter Pre-charge Failure The pre-charge circuit monitoring algorithm detected • Check AC input voltage on all phases
FAILURE Fault that the DC bus did not reach a factory set voltage
• Check input power wiring
level after charging for a period of time or the DC-bus • Replace drive if fault persists
voltage is too high.
FLT S29 – BUS REG OVERLOAD FL Bus Regulator Thermal Overload The shunt thermal model has exceeded its factory set • Modify the duty cycle of the application
Factory Limit Fault thermal capacity limit. • Add external shunt for additional capacity
• Add capacitor module
FLT S30 – BUS REG OVERLOAD UL Bus Regulator Thermal Overload The shunt thermal model has exceeded the thermal • Modify the duty cycle of the application
User Limit Fault capacity limit given by Bus Regulator Thermal • Add external shunt for additional capacity
Overload User Limit. • Increase the Bus Regulator Thermal Overload UL attribute value
• Add capacitor module
FLT S31 – BUS REG FAILURE Bus Regulator Failure The shunt circuit has detected the shunt resistor is • Check for shorts in the shunt connector
shorted. • Unplug the shunt connector and measure the resistance of the
shunt
• Replace drive if shunt resistor is shorted
FLT S33 – BUS UNDERVOLT FL Bus Undervoltage DC Bus voltage level is below the factory set limit as • Verify voltage level of the incoming AC
Factory Limit Fault determined by the configured input voltage. • Monitor AC power source for glitches or line droop
• Install UPS on AC input
FLT S34 – BUS UNDERVOLT UL Bus Undervoltage DC Bus voltage level is below the user set limit as • Verify voltage level of the incoming AC
User Limit Fault given by Bus Undervoltage User Limit. • Monitor AC power source for glitches or line droop
• Install UPS on AC input
• Increase Bus Undervoltage UL attribute value
FLT S35 – BUS OVERVOLT FL Bus Overvoltage DC Bus voltage level is above the factory set limit as • Change the deceleration or motion profile of all drives
Factory Limit Fault determined by the configured input voltage. connected to the DC bus
• Unplug the shunt connector and measure the resistance of the
shunt
• Replace drive if shunt resistor is open
FLT S39 – BUS POWER LEAKAGE Bus Power Leakage Fault Measured converter power exceeded estimated • Check bus power sharing configuration attribute
inverter output power by more than a factory limit. • Check AC input and DC bus sharing connections
FLT S45 – FDBK COMM FL Motor Feedback Data Loss The number of consecutive missed or corrupted serial • Check motor feedback cable and connector
Factory Limit Fault data packets, or invalid position feedback values from • Check motor power cable and feedback wire shields are secured
the intelligent feedback device has exceeded a factory correctly
set limit. • Check motor frame is grounded correctly


FLT S47 – FDBK DEVICE FAILURE nn Feedback Device Failure The feedback device has detected an internal error.
The nn sub-code is defined as follows:
1: ACCELERATION OVERFLOW
4: TRACKING FILTER ERROR
5: VECTOR LENGTH ERROR
6: COUNTER ERROR
7: SYNCHRONIZATION ERROR
16: SINGLE TURN ERROR
17: MULTI TURN AMPLITUDE ERROR
18: MULTI TURN SYNC ERROR
19: MULTI TURN VECTOR LENGTH ERROR • Check motor feedback cable and connector
35: STANDARD PARAMETER ERROR • Cycle control power
• Replace motor if fault continues
36: INTERNAL COMMUNICATION ERROR1 • Check feedback shield connection
37: INTERNAL COMMUNICATION ERROR2 • Reduce shock and vibration to motor
38: INTERNAL SYSTEM ERROR
48: CRITICAL TEMPERATURE
49: CRITICAL LED CURRENT
50: CRITICAL SUPPLY VOLTAGE
51: CRITICAL SPEED
52: CRITICAL ACCELERATION
53: COUNTER OVERFLOW
54: INTERNAL MONITORING ERROR
66: INTERNAL RESOURCE ACCESS ERROR (2)
88: POSITION OUT OF RANGE (3)
FLT S49 – BRAKE SLIP FLT Brake Slip Exception The brake proving function detected that motor Check motor brake.
displacement exceeded the brake slip tolerance while
the mechanical brake was engaged.
FLT S50 – POS HW OTRAVEL Hardware Overtravel - Positive The axis has moved beyond the digital input travel Check digital input and axis position.
limit in the positive direction.
FLT S51 – NEG HW OTRAVEL Hardware Overtravel - Negative The axis has moved beyond the digital input travel Check digital input and axis position.
limit in the negative direction.
FLT S54 – POSN ERROR (1) Excessive Position Error Fault The position error of the position control loop has • Check position loop tuning
exceeded the value given by Position Error Tolerance • Increase the feedforward gain
for a time period given by Position Error Tolerance • Verify sizing of the drive and motor
Time. • Check motor power wiring
• Increase Position Error Tolerance and/or Position Error Tolerance
Time attribute values
FLT S55 – VEL ERROR (1) Excessive Velocity Error Fault The velocity error of the velocity control loop has • Check velocity loop tuning
exceeded the value given by Velocity Error Tolerance • Reduce acceleration
for a time period given by Velocity Error Tolerance • Verify sizing of the drive and motor
Time. • Check motor power wiring
• Increase Velocity Error Tolerance and/or Velocity Error Tolerance
Time attribute values
FLT S56 – OVERTORQUE LIMIT (1) Overtorque Limit Fault Motor torque has risen above user defined maximum • Verify Torque Trim value
torque level given by Overtorque Limit for a time • Verify motion profile
period given by Overtorque Limit Time. • Verify sizing of the drive and motor
• Increase Overtorque Limit and/or Overtorque Limit Time
attribute values
FLT S57 – UNDERTORQUE LIMIT (1) Undertorque Limit Fault Motor torque has dropped below user defined • Verify motion profile
minimum torque level given by Undertorque Limit for • Verify sizing of the drive and motor
a time period given by Undertorque Limit Time. • Decrease Undertorque Limit and/or Undertorque Limit Time
attribute values
(1) Does not apply to induction motors in frequency control mode.
(2) For the 2198-H2DCK feedback converter kit, a Motion Axis Fault Reset is required and can take up to 30 seconds to complete. Cycling control power does not always fix the error.
(3) A control power cycle is required to reset the fault.


FLT M02 – MOTOR VOLTAGE Motor Voltage Mismatch Fault The configured voltage of the drive is greater than the Set the drive voltage to a lower value or replace motor with
motor rated voltage. For example, a 400V-class drive voltage rating that matches the drive.
with a 200V-class motor.
FLT M25 – DC COMMON BUS DC Common Bus Fault AC power was detected by the drive while configured • Check the drive power configuration from controller
for shared DC operation. • Check wiring
FLT M26 – RUNTIME ERROR Runtime Error The drive firmware encountered an unrecoverable • Cycle control power
runtime error. • Reset the drive
• Return drive for repair if fault continues
FLT M28 – SAFETY COMM Safety Module Communication Communication with the safety hardware within the • Cycle control power
(2198-Hxxx-ERS2 drives only) Error drive has failed. • Reset the drive

INIT FLT M01 – ENCODER DATA Smart Encoder Data Corruption The data stored in the encoder has a checksum error. • Cycle control power
• Return motor for repair if fault continues
INIT FLT M02 – MTR DATA Motor Data Range Error A motor data attribute stored in the encoder is out of
RANGE nn range. The nn sub-code is defined as follows:
01: DATA_RANGE_REV
02: DATA_RANGE_CONT_CURRENT
03: DATA_RANGE_PEAK_CURRENT
04: DATA_RANGE_RATED_POWER
05: DATA_RANGE_OVERLOAD_LIMIT
06: DATA_RANGE_THERMAL_CAPACITANCE
07: DATA_RANGE_THERMAL_RESISTANCE • Cycle control power
08: DATA_RANGE_MOTOR_RESISTANCE • Return motor for repair if fault continues
09: DATA_RANGE_MOTOR_INDUCTANCE
10: DATA_RANGE_INERTIA
11: DATA_RANGE_RATED_SPEED
12 DATA_RANGE_MAX_SPEED
13: DATA_RANGE_RATED_TORQUE
14: DATA_RANGE_TORQUE_CONST
15: DATA_RANGE_BACK_EMF_CONST
16: DATA_RANGE_POLE_PITCH
INIT FLT M03 – MTR ENC STARTUP Motor Feedback Communication Communication with the encoder could not be • Cycle control power
Startup established. • Check motor feedback connector
• Check motor power and feedback shield terminations on the
drive
• Return motor for repair if fault continues
INIT FLT M14 – SAFETY FIRMWARE Safety Firmware The loaded Safety firmware is not compatible with the • Cycle control power
drive firmware. • Update the drive firmware
INIT FLT M20 – UNKNOWN Unknown Module The product code of the power board is invalid. • Cycle control power
MODULE • Reset the drive
INIT FLT M21 – FACTORY CONFIG Factory Configuration Error Factory configuration data is missing or invalid • Cycle control power
• Reset the drive


INHIBIT S02 – MTR NOT CONFIG Motor Not Configured The motor has not been properly configured for use. Verify motor configuration in the Logix Designer application.
INHIBIT S03 – FEEDBACK NOT CONFIG Feedback Not Configured The feedback has not been properly configured for use. Verify feedback configuration in the Logix Designer application.
INHIBIT S05 – START INHIBIT Safe Torque Off Active The safety function has disabled the power structure. • Check SO.SafeTorqueOff bit of safety connection.
• Check if Reset is required (SI.ResetRequired on safety
connection, Axis.SafetyResetRequiredStatus on motion
connection) if so, toggle the SO.Reset bit on the safety
connection.
• Check that there is an active safety connection and the safety
controller is in run mode.
• Check for safety faults.
INHIBIT M04 – PROVING CONFIG Torque Prove Configuration - When Torque Proving configuration is enabled, control • Verify that the proper axis configuration has been selected.
Mfg Specific Start Inhibit mode, feedback mode, motor feedback type, and motor • Verify that sufficient torque prove current has been
option configuration must be set properly. configured.
INHIBIT M05 – SAFE TORQUE OFF Start Inhibit – Safe Torque Off The safety function has disabled the power structure. • Check safety input wiring
• Check state of safety devices

NODE FLT 01 – LATE CTRL UPDATE Control Connection Update Fault Several consecutive updates from the controller have • Remove unnecessary network devices from the motion
been lost. network
• Change network topology so that fewer devices share
common paths
• Use high performance network equipment
• Use shielded cables
• Separate signal wiring from power wiring
NODE FLT 02 – PROC WATCHDOG nn Processor Watchdog Fault The processor on the power board or control board
failed to update in a certain amount of time. • Cycle control power
• Update the drive firmware
The nn sub-codes 00…06 are internal and result in • Return drive for repair if fault continues
the same possible solution.
NODE FLT 03 – HARDWARE 00 Hardware Fault -PwrIF Communication with the power board could not be • Cycle control power
established. • Update the drive firmware
NODE FLT 03 – HARDWARE 02 Hardware Fault - DSL Communication with the encoder could not be • DSL feedback wiring is incorrect (check against wiring
established. diagram)
• DSL feedback wiring is shorted or open
• DSL feedback cable is defective
• Kinetix VP motor feedback device is defective
• Cycle power
NODE FLT 03 – HARDWARE 03 DSL Internal Hardware Fault A DSL hardware error internal to the drive was • Check DSL feedback device, wiring, and cable
detected. • Cycle power
NODE FLT 03 – HARDWARE 04 Hardware Fault - Board The control and power boards are incompatible. Return drive for repair if fault continues
Compatibility
NODE FLT 05 – CLOCK SKEW FLT Clock Skew Fault The controller time and the drive's system time are • Cycle control power
not the same. • Check controller and Ethernet switch operation
NODE FLT 06 – LOST CTRL CONN Lost Controller Connection Fault Communication with the controller has been lost. • Check Ethernet connection
• Check controller and Ethernet switch operation
NODE FLT 07 – CLOCK SYNC Clock Sync Fault Drive's local clock has lost synchronization with
• Check Ethernet connection
controller's clock and was not able to resynchronize • Check controller and Ethernet switch operation
within allotted time.
NODE FLT 09 – DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS Duplicate IP Address Fault Several consecutive updates from the controller have Select an IP address not already in use on the network
been lost.


NODE ALARM 01 – LATE CTRL UPDATE Control Connection Update Updates from the controller have been late. • Remove unnecessary network devices from the motion
Alarm network
• Change network topology so that fewer devices share
common paths
• Use high performance network equipment
• Use shielded cables
• Separate signal wiring from power wiring
NODE ALARM 03 – CLOCK JITTER Clock Jitter Alarm The sync variance has exceeded the sync threshold while • Check the Ethernet connection
the device is running in sync mode. • Check controller and Ethernet switch operation
NODE ALARM 04 – CLOCK SKEW ALARM Clock Skew Alarm The controller time and the drive’s time are not the same. • Check the Ethernet connection
• Check controller and Ethernet switch operation
NODE ALARM 05 – CLOCK SYNC ALARM Clock Sync Alarm Drive's local clock has lost synchronization with controller's • Check the Ethernet connection
clock for a short time during synchronous operation. • Check controller and Ethernet switch operation
SAFE FLT Fault Codes
For troubleshooting SAFE FLT fault codes, refer to Chapter 9 on page 174
(hardwired safety) or Chapter 10 on page 182 (integrated safety).

Kinetix 5500 Drive Status Indicators
The module status and network status indicators are just above the LCD status
display.
IMPORTANT Status indicators are not reliable for safety functions. Use them only for
general diagnostics during commissioning or troubleshooting. Do not
attempt to use status indicators to determine operational status.
Table 57 - Module Status Indicator

Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive Condition Status
Module Status Steady Off No power applied to the drive.
Network Status
Steady Green Drive is operational. No faults or failures.
Flashing Green Standby (drive not configured).
Major recoverable fault. The drive detected a recoverable fault, for example, an
Flashing Red incorrect or inconsistent configuration.
Steady Red Major fault. The drive detected a non-recoverable fault.
Flashing Green/Red Self-test. The drive performs self-test during powerup.
Table 58 - Network Status Indicator

Condition Status
Steady Off No power applied to the drive or IP address is not configured.
Flashing Green Drive connection is not established, but has obtained an IP address.
Steady Green Drive connection is established. Normal operation.
Connection timeout. One or more of the connections, for which this drive is the
Flashing Red target, has timed out.
Steady Red Duplicate IP address. IP address specified is already in use.
Flashing Green/Red Self-test. The drive performs self-test during powerup.
Table 59 - Ethernet Link Speed Status Indicator

Ethernet RJ45 Connectors Condition Status
Steady Off 10 Mbit
Link Speed
Status Indicators Steady On 100 Mbit
Table 60 - Ethernet Link/Activity Status Indicator

Link/Activity
Status Indicators Condition Status
Steady Off No link
Steady On Link established
Blinking Network activity

Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module Status Indicators
The capacitor module status indicator and module status (MS) connector are
on the front of the module. The module status connector is a relay output
suitable for wiring to the Logix5000 controller.
Table 61 - Module Status Indicator and Relay Output

Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module Module Status Relay Output (1) Status Resolution
Indicator
Module Status
Indicator Steady Green Closed Bus is fully charged and no faults exist. N/A
Control power is present and bus is
Flashing Green Open N/A
waiting to charge up.
• Cycle control and bus power
Recoverable fault
Flashing Red Open • Verify that AC input meets
(precharge or overvoltage fault). specifications
Module Status
(MS) Connector • Cycle control and bus power
Internal, non-recoverable fault condition • specifications
Verify that AC input meets
Steady Red Open inside the module. • Replace the module if fault
persists
(1) Wiring the module status relay output to the Logix5000 controller is optional.
General Troubleshooting These conditions do not always result in a fault code, but can require
troubleshooting to improve performance.
Condition Potential Cause Possible Resolution
The position feedback device is incorrect or open. Check wiring.
Unintentionally in Torque mode. Check to see what primary operation mode was programmed.
Motor tuning limits are set too high. Run Tune in the Logix Designer application.
Position loop gain or position controller accel/decel rate is improperly Run Tune in the Logix Designer application.
set.
Axis or system is unstable. Improper grounding or shielding techniques are causing noise to be
transmitted into the position feedback or velocity command lines, Check wiring and ground.
causing erratic axis movement.
Motor Select limit is incorrectly set (servo motor is not matched to axis • Check setups.
module). • Run Tune in the Logix Designer application.
Notch filter or output filter can be required (refer to Axis
Mechanical resonance. Properties dialog box, Output tab in the Logix Designer
application).
Torque Limit limits are set too low. Verify that torque limits are set properly.
Select the correct motor and run Tune in the Logix Designer
Incorrect motor selected in configuration. application again.
• Check motor size versus application need.
The system inertia is excessive.
You cannot obtain the motor • Review servo system sizing.
acceleration/deceleration that you The system friction torque is excessive. Check motor size versus application need.
want.
• Check motor size versus application need.
Available current is insufficient to supply the correct accel/decel rate. • Review servo system sizing.
Acceleration limit is incorrect. Verify limit settings and correct them, as necessary.
Velocity Limit limits are incorrect. Verify limit settings and correct them, as necessary.

Condition Potential Cause Possible Resolution

The axis cannot be enabled until stopping time has expired. Disable the axis, wait for 1.5 seconds, and enable the axis.
The motor wiring is open. Check the wiring.
• Check feedback connections.
The motor cable shield connection is improper. • Check cable shield connections.
Motor does not respond to a The motor has malfunctioned. Repair or replace the motor.
command. The coupling between motor and machine has broken (for example, the Check and correct the mechanics.
motor moves, but the load/machine does not).
Primary operation mode is set incorrectly. Check and properly set the limit.
Velocity or torque limits are set incorrectly. Check and properly set the limits.
Brake connector not wired Check brake wiring
• Verify grounding.
Recommended grounding per installation instructions have not been • Route wire away from noise sources.
followed. • Refer to System Design for Control of Electrical Noise,
publication GMC-RM001.
Presence of noise on command or • Verify grounding.
motor feedback signal wires. Line frequency can be present. • Route wire away from noise sources.
Variable frequency can be velocity feedback ripple or a disturbance • Decouple the motor for verification.
caused by gear teeth or ballscrew, and so forth. The frequency can be a • Check and improve mechanical performance, for example, the
multiple of the motor power transmission components or ballscrew gearbox or ballscrew mechanism.
speeds resulting in velocity disturbance.
The motor connections are loose or open. Check motor wiring and connections.
Foreign matter is lodged in the motor. Remove foreign matter.
The motor load is excessive. Verify the servo system sizing.
No rotation The bearings are worn. Return the motor for repair.
• Check brake wiring and function.
The motor brake is engaged (if supplied). • Return the motor for repair.
The motor is not connect to the load. Check coupling.
Change the command profile to reduce accel/decel or increase
The duty cycle is excessive.
Motor overheating time.
The rotor is partially demagnetized causing excessive motor current. Return the motor for repair.
Motor tuning limits are set too high. Run Tune in the Logix Designer application.
• Remove the loose parts.
Loose parts are present in the motor. • Return motor for repair.
• Replace motor.
Abnormal noise Through bolts or coupling is loose. Tighten bolts.
The bearings are worn. Return motor for repair.
Notch filter can be required (refer to Axis Properties dialog box,
Mechanical resonance. Output tab in the Logix Designer application).
Erratic operation - Motor locks into
position, runs without control or Motor power phases U and V, U and W, or V and W reversed. Check and correct motor power wiring.
with reduced torque.

Logix5000 Controller and By using the Logix Designer application, you can configure how the
Kinetix 5500 drives respond when a drive fault/exception occurs.
Drive Behavior
TIP The INIT FLT xxx faults are always generated after powerup, but before the
drive is enabled, so the stopping behavior does not apply.
NODE ALARM xxx faults do not apply because they do not trigger stopping
behavior.
The drive supports fault actions for Ignore, Alarm, Minor Fault, and Major
Fault as defined in Table 62. The drive also supports three configurable
stopping actions as defined in Table 64.
Refer to the drive behavior tables beginning on page 163 to see how the fault
and stopping actions apply to each of the exception fault codes.
Table 62 - Kinetix 5500 Drive Exception Action Definitions

Exception Action Definition
The drive completely ignores the exception condition. For some exceptions that are fundamental to
Ignore the operation of the planner, Ignore is not an available option.
The drive sets the associated bit in the Motion Alarm Status word, but does not otherwise affect axis
behavior. Like Ignore, if the exception is so fundamental to the drive, Alarm is not an available
Alarm option. When an exception action is set to Alarm, the Alarm goes away by itself when the
exceptional condition has cleared.
Minor Fault The drive latches the exception condition but the drive does not execute any exception action.
Major Fault The drive latches the exception condition and executes the configured exception action.
You can configure exception behavior in the Logix Designer application from
the Axis Properties dialog box, Actions category. These controller exception
actions are mapped to the drive exception actions.
Table 63 - Logix Designer Exception Action Definitions

Exception Action Definition
The controller completely ignores the exception condition. For some exceptions that are
Ignore fundamental to the operation of the planner, Ignore is not an available option.
The controller sets the associated bit in the Motion Alarm Status word, but does not otherwise affect
axis behavior. Like Ignore, if the exception is so fundamental to the drive, Alarm is not an available
Alarm option. When an exception action is set to Alarm, the Alarm goes away by itself when the
exceptional condition has cleared.
Like Alarm, Fault Status Only instructs the controller to set the associated bit in the Motion Fault
Status word, but does not otherwise affect axis behavior. However, unlike Alarm an explicit Fault
Fault Status Only Reset is required to clear the fault once the exceptional condition has cleared. Like Ignore and
Alarm, if the exception is so fundamental to the drive, Fault Status Only is not an available option.
The controller sets the associated bit in the Motion Fault Status word and instructs the Motion
Planner to perform a controlled stop of all planned motion at the configured maximum deceleration
Stop Planner rate. An explicit Fault Reset is required to clear the fault once the exceptional condition has cleared.
If the exception is so fundamental to the drive, Stop Planner is not an available option.
When the exception occurs, the associated bit in the Fault Status word is set and the axis comes to a
stop by using the stopping action defined by the drive for the particular exception that occurred.
Stop Drive There is no controller based configuration to specify what the stopping action is, the stopping action
is device dependant.
When the exception occurs, the drive brings the motor to a stop by using the stopping action
Shutdown defined by the drive (as in Stop Drive) and the power module is disabled. An explicit Shutdown
Reset is required to restore the drive to operation.

For Kinetix 5500 drives, only selected exceptions are configurable. In the drive
behavior tables, the controlling attribute is given for programmable fault
actions.
Table 64 - Configurable Stopping Actions

Stopping Action Description
Decel and hold Most control
The best available stopping action is the one that maintains
Decel and disable Less control the most control over the motor. However, not all faults
support every stopping action.
Disable and coast Least control
Only selected drive exceptions are configurable. In the drive behavior tables,
the controlling attribute is given for programmable fault actions.
Figure 71 - Logix Designer Axis Properties - Actions Category
This dialog box applies to Kinetix 5500 (EtherNet/IP network) servo drives.
Table 65 - Drive Behavior, FLT Sxx Fault Codes
Fault Action
Best Available
Minor Fault
Major Fault
Exception Fault Code Exception Text Permanent Induction Motor Stopping Action
Magnet Motor
(applies to major faults)
Ignore
Alarm
FLT S03 – MTR OVERSPEED FL Motor Overspeed X X Disable/Coast

Factory Limit Fault
FLT S04 – MTR OVERSPEED UL Motor Overspeed X X X X X Decel/Hold
User Limit Fault
FLT S05 – MTR OVERTEMP FL Motor Overtemperature X X Disable/Coast
Factory Limit Fault
FLT S07 – MTR OVERLOAD FL Motor Thermal Overload X X X Decel/Disable
Factory Limit Fault
FLT S08 – MTR OVERLOAD UL Motor Thermal OverLoad X X X X X X Decel/Hold
User Limit Fault

Table 65 - Drive Behavior, FLT Sxx Fault Codes (continued)

Fault Action
Best Available
Minor Fault
Major Fault
Magnet Motor
Ignore
Alarm
FLT S10 – INV OVERCURRENT Inverter Overcurrent Fault X X X Disable/Coast
FLT S11 – INV OVERTEMP FL Inverter Overtemperature X X X Disable/Coast
Factory Limit Fault
FLT S13 – INV OVERLOAD FL Inverter Thermal Overload X X X Disable/Coast
Factory Limit Fault
FLT S14 – INV OVERLOAD UL Inverter Thermal Overload X X X X X X Decel/Hold
User Limit Fault
FLT S15 – CONV OVERCURRENT Converter Overcurrent Fault X X X Disable/Coast
FLT S16 – GROUND CURRENT Ground Current X X X Disable/Coast
Factory Limit Fault
FLT S18 – CONV OVERTEMP FL Converter OverTemp X X X Disable/Coast
Factory Limit Fault
FLT S20 – CONV OVERLOAD FL Converter Thermal OverLoad X X X Disable/Coast
Factory Limit Fault
FLT S21 – CONV OVERLOAD UL Converter Thermal Overload X X X X X X Decel/Hold
User Limit Fault
FLT S23 – AC PHASE LOSS AC Single Phase Loss Fault X X X X X X Disable/Coast
FLT S25 – PRECHARGE FAILURE Pre-charge Failure Fault X X X Disable/Coast
FLT S29 – BUS OVERLOAD FL Bus Regulator Thermal X X X Disable/Coast
OverLoad
Factory Limit Fault
FLT S30 – BUS OVERLOAD UL Bus Regulator Thermal Overload X X X X X X Decel/Hold
User Limit Fault
FLT S31 – BUS REG FAILURE Bus Regulator Failure X X X Disable/Coast
FLT S33 – BUS UNDERVOLT FL Bus Undervoltage X X X Decel/Disable
Factory Limit Fault
FLT S34 – BUS UNDERVOLT UL Bus Undervoltage X X X X X X Decel/Hold
User Limit Fault
FLT S35 – BUS OVERVOLT FL Bus Overvoltage X X X Disable/Coast
Factory Limit Fault
FLT S39 – BUS POWER LEAKAGE Bus Power Leakage Fault X X X Decel/Coast
FLT S45 – FDBK COMM FL Motor Feedback Data Loss X X Disable/Coast
Factory Limit Fault
FLT S47 – FDBK DEVICE FAILURE Feedback Device Failure X X Disable/Coast
FLT S49 – BRAKE SLIP FLT Brake Slip Exception X X X X X Decel/Hold
FLT S50 – POS HW OTRAVEL Hardware Overtravel - Positive X X X X X X Decel/Hold
FLT S51 – NEG HW OTRAVEL Hardware Overtravel - Negative X X X X X X Decel/Hold
FLT S54 – POSN ERROR Excessive Position Error Fault X X X X X Disable/Coast
FLT S55 – VEL ERROR Excessive Velocity Error Fault X X X X X Disable/Coast
FLT S56 – OVERTORQUE LIMIT Overtorque Limit Fault X X X X X Decel/Hold
FLT S57 – UNDERTORQUE LIMIT Undertorque Limit Fault X X X X X Decel/Hold

Table 66 - Drive Behavior, FLT Mxx Fault Codes

Fault Action
Best Available
Minor Fault
Major Fault
Magnet Motor
Ignore
Alarm
FLT M02 – MOTOR VOLTAGE Motor Voltage Mismatch Fault X X X X X Disable/Coast
FLT M25 – COMMON BUS DC Common Bus Fault X X X Disable/Coast
FLT M26 – RUNTIME ERROR Runtime Error X X X Disable/Coast
FLT M28 – SAFETY COMM Safety Module Communication X X X Disable/Coast
(2198-Hxxx-ERS2 drives only) Error
Table 67 - Drive Behavior, NODE FLT Fault Codes

Fault Action
Best Available
Minor Fault
Major Fault
Permanent
Exception Fault Code Exception Text Magnet Motor Induction Motor Stopping Action
Ignore
Alarm
NODE FLT 01 – LATE CTRL UPDATE Control Connection Update X X X Decel/Disable
Fault
NODE FLT 02 – PROC WATCHDOG Processor Watchdog Fault X X X Disable/Coast
NODE FLT 03 – HARDWARE Hardware Fault X X X Disable/Coast
NODE FLT 05 – CLOCK SKEW FLT Clock Skew Fault X X X Disable/Coast
NODE FLT 06 – LOST CTRL CONN Lost Controller Connection Fault X X X Decel/Disable
NODE FLT 07 – CLOCK SYNC Clock Sync Fault X X X Disable/Coast
NODE FLT 09 – DUPLICATE IP ADDRESS Duplicate IP Address Fault X X X Disable/Coast

Notes:

Chapter 8
Remove and Replace Servo Drives
This chapter provides remove and replace procedures for Kinetix 5500 drives.
Topic Page
Before You Begin 167
Remove and Replace Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives 168
Start and Configure the Drive 170
ATTENTION: This drive contains electrostatic discharge (ESD) sensitive parts

and assemblies. You are required to follow static-control precautions when
you install, test, service, or repair this assembly. If you do not follow ESD
control procedures, components can be damaged. If you are not familiar with
static control procedures, refer to Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage,
publication 8000-4.5.2, or any other applicable ESD awareness handbook.
Before You Begin When each drive is installed, network settings are configured from the setup
screens. Before removing the drive, revisit the Network menu and make note of
the static IP or DHCP settings. Refer to Configure the Drive on page 108 to
access those settings.
IMPORTANT If you intend to use the same Logix Designer application after replacing
your drive, the new drive must be the same catalog number as the old
drive.
You also need these tools available before you begin removal and replacement
procedures:
• Screwdrivers (to loosen/remove screws)
• Voltmeter (to make sure no voltage exists on drive connectors)
• Non-conductive probe for removing DC bus T-connectors

Chapter 8 Remove and Replace Servo Drives
Remove and Replace Follow these steps to remove and replace servo drives from the panel.
Remove Power and All Connections
1. Verify that all control and input power has been removed from the
system.
ATTENTION: To avoid shock hazard or personal injury, make sure

that all power has been removed before proceeding. This system can
have multiple sources of power. More than one disconnect switch
can be required to de-energize the system.
2. Wait five minutes for the DC bus to discharge completely before

proceeding.
SHOCK HAZARD: This product contains stored energy devices. To

avoid the hazard of electrical shock, verify that voltage on capacitors
has been discharged before attempting to service, repair, or remove
this unit. Do not attempt the procedures in this document unless you
are qualified to do so and are familiar with solid-state control
equipment and the safety procedures in publication NFPA 70E.
3. Label and remove all wiring connectors from the drive you are removing.
To identify each connector, refer to Kinetix 5500 Connector Data on
page 60.
TIP You do not need to remove the shunt (RC) connector, unless there is
an external shunt wired to it.
4. Remove the shared-bus input wiring connectors, T-connectors, and bus-

bars from the drive you are removing.
IMPORTANT DC bus T-connectors latch on both sides when inserted into the
drive. To remove the DC bus T-connector, at least one latch must be
pried away with a non-conductive probe.
Refer to Shared-bus Connection System on page 49.

5. Use a screwdriver to loosen the
two cable clamp screws,
removing the screw on the Retention Screw
right. (loosen, do not remove)
Motor Cable
6. Remove the single motor cable from the cable shield clamp.
7. Remove the ground screw and braided ground strap.
Refer to Ground the System Subpanel on page 78.

Remove and Replace Servo Drives Chapter 8
Remove the Servo Drive
You can remove single-axis drives from the panel or any single drive from a
multi-axis configuration by using the same procedure.
IMPORTANT This procedure applies to any 2198-Hxxx-ERSx drive in any configuration.
Follow these steps to remove Kinetix 5500 servo drives from the panel.
1. Loosen the top and bottom screws of the drive to remove.

Frame 1 and 2 drives have one top and bottom screw. Frame 3 drives
have two top and bottom screws.
2. Grasp the top and bottom of the drive with both hands and pull the
drive straight out and away from the panel, clearing the zero-stack
mounting tabs and cutouts.
2 1
(removing middle drive)
Top Screws
(bottom screws not shown)
Replace the Servo Drive
To replace the servo drive, reverse the steps shown above or refer to Mount
Your Kinetix 5500 Drive on page 58:
• Torque mounting, shield clamp, and ground screws to 2.0 N•m
(17.7 lb•in) max.
• Reconnect the feedback connector kit and torque the mounting screws
to 0.4 N•m (3.5 lb•in) max.

Chapter 8 Remove and Replace Servo Drives
Start and Configure the Drive Follow these steps to configure the replacement drive.
IMPORTANT If you intend to use the same Logix Designer application after replacing
your drive, the new drive must be the same catalog number as the old
drive.
IMPORTANT If a 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 drive was previously configured by a safety controller,

reset the drive to the Out of Box state. Refer to Out-of-Box State on
page 184.
1. Reapply power to the drive/system.

Refer to Apply Power to the Kinetix 5500 Drive on page 140 for the
procedure.
2. Configure the network settings for the drive.
a. If your old drive was configured as Static IP, you need to set the IP
address, gateway, and subnet mask in the new drive identical to the
old drive.
Refer to Configure the Drive on page 108 to access those settings.
b. If you replaced a 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive in an integrated safety
application, review Understanding Integrated Safety Drive
Replacement on page 185 and follow the appropriate procedure in
Replacing an Integrated Safety Drive in a GuardLogix System on
page 186 to properly set the safety network number for the new
drive.
3. Download the Logix Designer application to the controller.
4. Verify the drive/system is working properly.

Chapter 9
Kinetix 5500 Safe Torque-off - Hardwired

Safety
The 2198-Hxxx-ERS servo drives are equipped for hardwired safe torque-off
(STO). The hardwired STO function meets the requirements of Performance
Level d (PLd) and safety category 3 (CAT 3) per EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL 2
per IEC EN 61508, EN 61800-5-2 and EN 62061.
Topic Page
Certification 171
Description of Operation 173
Probability of Dangerous Failure Per Hour 175
Safe Torque-off Connector Data 175
Wire the Safe Torque-off Circuit 176
Safe Torque-off Feature 177
Safe Torque-off Specifications 178
A ControlLogix 5570, ControlLogix 5580, or CompactLogix 5370 controller

is required for hardwired safety control of the Kinetix 5500 safe torque-off
function. The 2198-Hxxx-ERS servo drives use the STO connector for wiring
external safety devices and cascading hardwired safety connections from one
drive to another.
Certification The TÜV Rheinland group has approved the 2198-Hxxx-ERS servo drives
with hardwired safe torque-off for use in safety-related applications up to
EN ISO 13849-1 Performance Level d (PLd) and Category 3, SIL 2 per IEC
EN 61508, EN 61800-5-2, and EN 62061, in which removing the motion
producing power is considered to be the safe state.
Refer to Appendix E on page 261 for these certification documents.

• EC Type - Examination Certificate
• EC Declaration of Conformity
• European Union Directives

Chapter 9 Kinetix 5500 Safe Torque-off - Hardwired Safety
Important Safety Considerations
The system user is responsible for the following:

• Validation of any sensors or actuators connected to the system
• Completing a machine-level risk assessment
• Certification of the machine to the desired EN ISO 13849-1
performance level or EN 62061 SIL level
• Project management and proof testing in accordance with
EN ISO 13849
Category 3 Requirements According to EN ISO 13849-1

Safety-related parts are designed with these attributes:
• A single fault in any of these parts does not lead to the loss of the safety
function.
• A single fault is detected whenever reasonably practicable.
• Accumulation of undetected faults can lead to the loss of the safety
function and a failure to remove motion producing power from the
motor.
Stop Category Definition

Stop Category 0 as defined in EN 60204 or safe torque-off as defined by
EN 61800-5-2 is achieved with immediate removal of motion producing
power to the actuator.
IMPORTANT In the event of a malfunction, the most likely stop category is Stop Category
0. When designing the machine application, timing and distance must be
considered for a coast to stop. For more information regarding stop
categories, refer to EN 60204-1.
Performance Level (PL) and Safety Integrity Level (SIL)

For safety-related control systems, Performance Level (PL), according to EN
ISO 13849-1, and SIL levels, according to EN 61508 and EN 62061, include a
rating of the systems ability to perform its safety functions. All of the safety-
related components of the control system must be included in both a risk
assessment and the determination of the achieved levels.
Refer to the EN ISO 13849-1, EN 61508, and EN 62061 standards for

complete information on requirements for PL and SIL determination.

Kinetix 5500 Safe Torque-off - Hardwired Safety Chapter 9
Description of Operation The safe torque-off feature provides a method, with sufficiently low probability
of failure, to force the power-transistor control signals to a disabled state.
When disabled, or any time power is removed from the safety enable inputs, all
of the drive output-power transistors are released from the ON-state. This
results in a condition where the drive performs a Category 0 Stop. Disabling
the power transistor output does not provide mechanical isolation of the
electrical output that is required for some applications.
Under normal operation, the safe torque-off inputs are energized. If either of
the safety enable inputs are de-energized, then all of the output power
transistors turn off. The safe torque-off response time is less then 12 ms.
ATTENTION: Permanent magnet motors can, in the event of two

simultaneous faults in the IGBT circuit, result in a rotation of up to 180
electrical degrees.
ATTENTION: If any of the safety enable inputs de-energize, the Start Inhibit
field indicates SafeTorqueOffInhibit and GuardStopRequestStatus bit of
AxisGuardStatus tag set to 1. Both inputs must be de-energized within 1
second and re-energized within 1 second to avoid GuardStopInputFault
conditions.
Figure 72 - System Operation when Inputs are Meeting Timing Requirements
24V DC
SS_IN_CH0
0V DC
24V DC
SS_IN_CH1
0V DC
1
GuardStopInputFault 1 Second
0
100 ms
1
GuardStopRequestStatus
0
1 23 4 5 6
Event Description
1 At least one input is switched-off. GuardStopRequestStatus bit is set to 1.
Second input is switched-off within 1 second. This event must always occur prior to Event 3 to prevent
2 GuardStopInputFault.
3 First input is switched-on.
4 Second input is switched-on within 1 second of event 3.
Both inputs are in OFF state simultaneously within 1 second. As a result, GuardStopInputFault is not
5 posted.
The GuardStopRequestStatus bit sets back to 0 if event 4 occurs within a 100 ms interval after event 3. If
event 4 is outside of the 100 ms interval, but within the a 1 second interval after event 3, then the
6 GuardStop RequestStatus bit sets back to 0 after the 1 second interval following event 3 (not
immediately following event 4).

Troubleshoot the Safe Torque-off Function

Table 68 - 2198-Hxxx-ERS Servo Drive Troubleshooting
Exception Code on Drive Display Exception Text Problem Possible Solutions
• Verify safety wiring and connections:
– Wire terminations at safe torque-off (STO) connector
Safe torque-off function mismatch. The – Cable/header not seated correctly
system does not allow motion. Safe torque-off – +24V power
SAFE FLT 09 - SS IN Guard Stop Input Fault mismatch is detected when safety inputs are • Check state of safety inputs.
in a different state for more than 1.0 second.
• Reset error and run proof test.
• If error persists, return the drive to Rockwell Automation.
Figure 73 demonstrates when the safe torque-off mismatch is detected and a

GuardStopInputFault is posted.
Figure 73 - System Operation in the Event that the Safety Enable Inputs Mismatch
24V DC
SS_IN_CH0
0V DC
24V DC
SS_IN_CH1
0V DC
1
GuardStopInputFault
0
1 Second
1
SafeTorqueOffInhibit
0
When one safety input is turned off, the second input must also be turned off,
otherwise a fault is asserted (see Figure 74). The fault is asserted even if the first
safety input is turned on again, without the second input transitioning to the
ON state.
Figure 74 - System Operation in the Event that the Safety Enable Inputs Mismatch
Momentarily
24V DC
SS_IN_CH0
0V DC
24V DC
SS_IN_CH1
0V DC
1
GuardStopInputFault
0
1 Second
1
SafeTorqueOffInhibit
0
ATTENTION: The safe torque-off fault is detected upon demand of the safe
torque-off function. After troubleshooting the STO function or performing
maintenance that might affect the STO function, the STO function must be
executed to verify correct operation.

IMPORTANT The GuardStopInputFault can be reset only if both inputs are in the OFF-
state for more than 1 second. After the fault reset requirement is satisfied,
an MAFR command in the Logix Designer application must be issued to reset
the GuardStopInputFault.
Probability of Dangerous Safety-related systems are classified as operating in a High-demand/continuous

mode. The SIL value for a High-demand/continuous mode safety-related
Failure Per Hour system is directly related to the probability of a dangerous failure occurring per
hour (PFH).
PFH calculation is based on the equations from EN 61508 and show worst-
case values. Table 69 provides data for a 20-year proof test interval and
demonstrates the worst-case effect of various configuration changes on the
data.
IMPORTANT Determination of safety parameters is based on the assumptions that

the system operates in High-demand mode and that the safety function
is requested at least once every three months.
Table 69 - PFH for 20-year Proof Test Interval

Attribute Value
PFH (1e-9) 0.35
Proof test (years) 20
Safe Torque-off Connector The 10-pin connector consists of two parallel 5-pin rows for cascading safety
connections from drive-to-drive in multi-axis configurations.
Data
Figure 75 - Pin Orientation for 10-pin Safe Torque-off (STO) Connector
Pin 1 SB+
SB-
S1
SC
S2
Table 70 - Safe Torque-off (STO) Connector Pinouts

STO Pin Description Signal
Safety bypass plus signal. Connect to both safety inputs to disable the STO
1 SB+
function.
Safety bypass minus signal. Connect to safety common to disable the STO
2 SB-
function.
3 STO input 1 (SS_IN_CH0). S1
4 STO input common (SCOM). SC
5 STO input 2 (SS_IN_CH1). S2

Wire the Safe Torque-off This section provides guidelines for wiring your Kinetix 5500 safe torque-off
drive connections.
Circuit
IMPORTANT The National Electrical Code and local electrical codes take precedence over
the values and methods provided.
established in Establishing Noise Zones beginning on page 41.
IMPORTANT Pins ST0-1 and ST0-5 (SB+ and SB-) are used to disable the safe torque-off
function. When wiring to the STO connector, use an external 24V supply for
the external safety device that triggers the safe torque-off request. To avoid
jeopardizing system performance, do not use pin ST0-1 as a power supply
for the external safety device.
Safe Torque-off Wiring Requirements
The safe torque-off (STO) connector uses spring tension to secure the wire.
Depress the tab, along side each pin, to insert or release the wire. Two rows of
pins are provided for drive-to-drive connections. Wire must be copper with
75 °C (167 °F) minimum rating.
IMPORTANT Stranded wires must terminate with ferrules to prevent short circuits, per
table D7 of EN ISO 13849-1.
Figure 76 - Safe Torque-off (STO) Terminal Plug
Kinetix 5500 Drive

Top View
1
2
3
4
SB+-
Fo Only
5
Rem r DC
ove
Bus
SB
S1
SC
S2
Table 71 - Safe Torque-off (STO) Terminal Plug Wiring

Safe Torque-off (STO) Connector Recommended Wire
Size Strip Length Torque Value
Pin Signal mm2 (AWG)
STO-1 SB+
STO-2 SB- 0.2…1.5
STO-3 S1 10 (0.25) N/A (1)
(24…16)
STO-4 SC
STO-5 S2
(1) This connector uses spring tension to hold the wires in place.

Safe Torque-off Feature The safe torque-off circuit, when used with suitable safety components,
provides protection according to EN ISO 13849-1 (PLd), Category 3 or
according to IEC EN 61508, EN 61800-5-2, and EN 62061 (SIL CL2). All
components in the system must be chosen and applied correctly to achieve the
desired level of operator safeguarding.
The safe torque-off circuit is designed to safely turn off all of the output-power
transistors. You can use the safe torque-off circuit in combination with other
safety devices to achieve Stop Category 0 and protection-against-restart as
specified in IEC 60204-1.
ATTENTION: This option is suitable only for performing mechanical work on

the drive system or affected area of a machine. It does not provide electrical
safety.
SHOCK HAZARD: In Safe Torque-off mode, hazardous voltages can still be

present at the drive. To avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect power to
the system and verify that the voltage is zero before performing any work on
the drive.
ATTENTION: Personnel responsible for the application of safety-related

programmable electronic systems (PES) shall be aware of the safety
requirements in the application of the system and shall be trained in using
the system.
Safe Torque-off Feature Bypass
The 2198-Hxxx-ERS drives do not operate without a safety circuit or safety

bypass wiring. For applications that do not require the safe torque-off feature
you must install jumper wires to bypass the safe torque-off circuitry.
Each 2198-Hxxx-ERS drive includes one 10-pin wiring plug for wiring to
safety devices. To bypass the safety function, wire these signals as shown in
Figure 77. With the jumper wires installed, the safe-off feature is not used.
Figure 77 - Safe Torque-off Bypass Wiring
Pin 1 SB+
SB-
S1
SC
S2

Cascade the Safe Torque-off Signal

The total number of drives in a single cascaded safety circuit is limited by the
current carrying capacity of the cascaded safety wiring. Refer to Table 72 for
current rating per channel, per drive.
Figure 78 - Cascaded Safe Torque-off Wiring
Dual-channel First Drive Middle Drive Last Drive

Equivalent SB+
Safety Device Pin 1 Pin 1
SB-
S1
SC
S2
24V DC
Safe Torque-off To maintain safety rating, Kinetix 5500 drives must be installed inside
protected control panels or cabinets appropriate for the environmental
Specifications conditions of the industrial location. The protection class of the panel or
cabinet must be IP54 or higher.
Table 72 - Safe Torque-off Signal Specifications

Attribute Value
Input current < 10 mA
Input ON voltage range 18…26.4V DC
Input OFF voltage, max 5V DC
Input ON current, per input, max 10 mA, each drive (1)
Safety inputs
(per channel) Input OFF current, max 2 mA
(@ V in < 5V DC)
Pulse rejection width 700 s
External power supply SELV/PELV
Input type Optically isolated and reverse voltage protected
(1) The maximum number of drives cascaded with safe torque-off wiring is 50.
For additional information regarding Allen-Bradley safety products, including

safety relays, light curtain, and gate interlock applications, refer to the Safety
Products Catalog, website http://www.ab.com/catalogs.

Chapter 10
Kinetix 5500 Safe Torque-off - Integrated

Safety
The 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drives are equipped for integrated safe torque-off
(STO). The integrated STO function meets the requirements of Performance
Level e (PLe) and safety category 3 (CAT 3) per EN ISO 13849-1 and SIL 3
per IEC EN 61508, EN 61800-5-2 and EN 62061.
With integrated safety, the GuardLogix 5570 or Compact GuardLogix 5570

safety controller issues the safe torque-off (STO) command over the EtherNet/
IP network and the 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive executes the STO command.
Topic Page
Certification 179
Description of Operation 181
Probability of Dangerous Failure Per Hour 183
Safe Torque-off Feature 183
Out-of-Box State 184
Understanding Integrated Safety Drive Replacement 185
Replacing an Integrated Safety Drive in a GuardLogix System 186
Motion Direct Commands in Motion Control Systems 193
Certification The TÜV Rheinland group has approved the 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drives
with integrated safe torque-off for use in safety-related applications up to PLe,
Category 3 according to EN ISO 13849 and SIL CL3 according to
IEC 61508, EN 61800-5-2, and EN 62061, in which removing the motion
producing power is considered to be the safe state.
Refer to Appendix E on page 261 for these certification documents.

• EC Type - Examination Certificate
• EC Declaration of Conformity
• European Union Directives

Chapter 10 Kinetix 5500 Safe Torque-off - Integrated Safety
Important Safety Considerations
The system user is responsible for the following:

• Validation of any sensors or actuators connected to the system
• Completing a machine-level risk assessment
• Certification of the machine to the desired EN ISO 13849-1
performance level or EN 62061 SIL level
• Project management and proof testing performed in accordance with
EN ISO 13849
Safety Application Requirements

Safety application requirements include evaluating probability of failure rates
(PFH), system reaction time settings, and functional verification tests that
fulfill SIL 3 criteria. Refer to Probability of Dangerous Failure Per Hour on
page 183 for more PFH information.
Creating, recording, and verifying the safety signature is also a required part of
the safety application development process. Safety signatures are created by the
safety controller. The safety signature consists of an identification number,
date, and time that uniquely identifies the safety portion of a project. This
includes all safety logic, data, and safety I/O configuration.
For safety system requirements, including information on the safety network

number (SNN), verifying the safety signature, and functional verification tests
refer to the GuardLogix 5570 Controller Systems Safety Reference Manual,
publication 1756-RM099.
IMPORTANT You must read, understand, and fulfill the requirements detailed in
publication 1756-RM099 prior to operating a safety system that uses a
GuardLogix controller and 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive.
Category 3 Requirements According to ISO 13849

Safety-related parts are designed with these attributes:
• A single fault in any of these parts does not lead to the loss of the safety
function.
• A single fault is detected whenever reasonably practicable.
• Accumulation of undetected faults can lead to the loss of the safety
function and a failure to remove motion producing power from the
motor.

Kinetix 5500 Safe Torque-off - Integrated Safety Chapter 10
Stop Category Definition

Stop Category 0 as defined in EN 60204 or safe torque-off as defined by
EN 61800-5-2 is achieved with immediate removal of motion producing
power to the actuator.
IMPORTANT In the event of a malfunction, the most likely stop category is Stop Category
0. When designing the machine application, timing and distance must be
considered for a coast to stop. For more information regarding stop
categories, refer to EN 60204-1.
Performance Level (PL) and Safety Integrity Level (SIL)

For safety-related control systems, Performance Level (PL), according to EN
ISO 13849-1, and SIL levels, according to EN 61508 and EN 62061, include a
rating of the systems ability to perform its safety functions. All of the safety-
related components of the control system must be included in both a risk
assessment and the determination of the achieved levels.
Refer to the EN ISO 13849-1, EN 61508, and EN 62061 standards for

complete information on requirements for PL and SIL determination.
Description of Operation The safe torque-off (STO) feature provides a method, with sufficiently low
probability of failure, to force the power-transistor control signals to a disabled
state. When the command to execute the STO function is received from the
GuardLogix controller, all of the drive output-power transistors are released
from the ON-state. This results in a condition where the drive is coasting.
Disabling the power transistor output does not provide mechanical isolation of
the electrical output that is required for some applications.
The 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 drive STO function response time is less than 10 ms.
Response time is the delay between the time the drive STO function receives
the integrated safety packet with an STO request and the time when motion
producing power is removed from the motor.
STO State Reset
The 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drives support both manual and automatic restart
types for exiting the STO state.
• Manual restart indicates a transition from 0 to 1 on the SO.Reset tag
is required to allow torque after the SO.SafeTorqueOff tag has
transitioned from 0 to 1.
• Automatic restart indicates torque will be allowed only by
transitioning the SO.SafeTorqueOff tag from 0 to 1. The SO.Reset
tag is used only for resetting safety faults.

IMPORTANT 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drives enter the STO state if any STO function fault
is detected. Refer to Table 73 for integrated safety troubleshooting.
Refer to Figure 79 for an understanding of the 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 STO-state

manual restart functionality.
Figure 79 - Kinetix 5500 STO Timing Diagram - Manual Restart
Drv:SO.SafeTorqueOff
Drv:SO.Reset
Drv:SI.ResetRequired
Drv:SI.TorqueDisabled
Axis.SafeTorqueOffActiveInhibit
Axis.SafeTorqueOffActiveStatus
Axis.SafeTorqueDisabledStatus
Axis.SafetyResetRequestStatus
Axis.SafetyResetRequiredStatus
Safe Torque-off Request Reset Request
Troubleshoot the Safe Torque-off Function

Table 73 - 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 Servo Drive Troubleshooting
Exception Code on Drive Display Exception Text Problem Possible Solutions
Drive safety diagnostic detected internal • Cycle control power
SAFE FLT S01- Safety Core Internal Safety Core Internal STO design failure. • Return drive for repair if fault continues
• Cycle control power
Drive safety diagnostic detected internal
SAFE FLT S03- Safe Torque Off Safe Torque Off • Execute STO function
STO design failure.
• Cycle control power
The loaded Safety firmware is not
INIT FLT M14 - Safety Firmware Safety Firmware • Update the drive firmware
compatible with the drive firmware. • Return drive for repair if fault continues

Probability of Dangerous Safety-related systems are classified as operating in a High-demand/continuous

mode. The SIL value for a High-demand/continuous mode safety-related
Failure Per Hour system is directly related to the probability of a dangerous failure occurring per
hour (PFH).
PFH calculation is based on the equations from EN 61508 and show worst-
case values. Table 74 provides data for a 20-year proof test interval and
demonstrates the worst-case effect of various configuration changes on the
data.
IMPORTANT Determination of safety parameters is based on the assumptions that

the system operates in High-demand mode and that the safety function
is requested at least once every three months.
Table 74 - PFH for 20-year Proof Test Interval

Attribute Value
PFH (1e-9) 1.54
Proof test (years) 20
Safe Torque-off Feature The safe torque-off feature, when used with suitable safety components,
provides protection according to EN ISO 13849-1 (PLe), Category 3 or
according to IEC 61508, EN 61800-5-2, and EN 62061 (SIL CL3). All
components in the system must be chosen and applied correctly to achieve the
desired level of operator safeguarding.
The safe torque-off feature is designed to safely turn off all of the output power
transistors. You can use the safe torque-off feature in combination with other
safety devices to achieve Stop Category 0 and protection-against-restart as
specified in IEC 60204-1.
ATTENTION: This option is designed to restrict motion producing power on

the drive system or affected area of a machine. It does not provide electrical
safety.
SHOCK HAZARD: In Safe Torque-off mode, hazardous voltages can still be

present at the drive. To avoid an electric shock hazard, disconnect power to
the system and verify that the voltage is zero before performing any work on
the drive.
ATTENTION: Personnel responsible for the application of safety-related

programmable electronic systems (PES) shall be aware of the safety
requirements in the application of the system and shall be trained in using
the system.

Out-of-Box State The 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drives ship in the out-of-box state.
ATTENTION: In the out-of-box state, motion producing power is allowed by

the safe torque-off (STO) function unless an integrated safety connection
configuration has been applied to the drive at least once.
In the out-of-box state, you can configure 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drives:

• Without a GuardLogix 5570 safety controller for a non-safety
application.
• With a GuardLogix 5570 safety controller when the safe torque-off
(STO) function is not required.
Out-of-Box State Support

After the integrated safety connection configuration is applied to the
2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive at least once, you can restore the drive to the out-
of-box state.
Follow these steps to restore your 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive to the out-of-
box state.
1. Right-click the 2198-Hxxx-ERS2

servo drive you created and choose
Properties.
2. Click the Connection tab.

The Connection tab appears.
3. Check Inhibit Module.

4. Click Apply and click the Safety tab.

The Safety tab appears.
5. In the Configuration Ownership field, click Reset Ownership.
IMPORTANT Only authorized personnel should attempt Reset Ownership.
If any active connection is detected, the reset is rejected.

6. Cycle drive power.
The drive is in the out-of-box state.
IMPORTANT If power to the drive is not cycled after step 5, the drive does not
transition to the out-of-box state and maintains STO function.
IMPORTANT When the drive returns to the out-of-box state, STO safety
integrity is lost.
Understanding Integrated GuardLogix controllers retain I/O device configuration on-board and are able
to download the configuration to the replacement device.
Safety Drive Replacement
IMPORTANT If a 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive was used previously, clear the existing
configuration before installing it on a safety network by resetting the
drive to its out-of-box condition. To see how this is done, refer to Out-of-
Box State Support on page 184.
Replacing a 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive that sits on an integrated safety

network is more complicated than replacing standard devices because of the
safety network number (SNN).

The device number and SNN make up the safety device’s DeviceID. Safety
devices require this more complex identifier to make sure that duplicate device
numbers do not compromise communication between the correct safety
devices. The SNN is also used to provide integrity on the initial download to
the 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive.
When the Logix Designer application is online, the Safety tab of the Module
Properties dialog box displays the current configuration ownership. When the
opened project owns the configuration, Local is displayed.
Communication error is displayed if the module read fails. Refer to Replacing

an Integrated Safety Drive in a GuardLogix System on page 186 for integrated
safety drive replacement examples.
Replacing an Integrated Use the Configure Always feature when you are not relying on the entire
routable integrated safety control system to maintain PLe/SIL 3 behavior
Safety Drive in a GuardLogix during the replacement and functional testing of a 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo
System drive. Drive replacement is configured on the Safety tab of the GuardLogix
controller.
IMPORTANT If you are relying on a portion of the integrated safety system to

maintain SIL 3 behavior during drive replacement and functional testing,
do not use the Configure Always feature.
Figure 80 - Setting the SNN with a GuardLogix Controller

Replacement with Configure Only When No Safety Signature Exists

Enabled
When a 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive is replaced and the DeviceID of the new
drive matches the original, you can download the configuration from the safety
controller. The DeviceID is a combination of the node/IP address and the
safety network number (SNN), and is updated whenever the SNN is set.
If the project is configured as Configure Only When No Safety Signature

Exists, follow the appropriate instructions in Table 75 to replace a 2198-Hxxx-
ERS2 drive based on your scenario. Once you have completed the steps
correctly and the DeviceID matches the original, the safety controller is
enabled to download the proper drive configuration and re-establish the safety
connection.
Table 75 - Replacing a 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 Servo Drive

GuardLogix Safety Replacement Module Condition Action Required
Signature Exists
No No SNN (out-of-box)
Same SNN as original safety task None. The module is ready for use.
Yes or No configuration
Yes No SNN (out-of-box) Refer to Scenario 1 on page 187.
Yes Different SNN than original safety task Refer to Scenario 2 on page 189.
No configuration Refer to Scenario 3 on page 191.
Scenario 1 - Replacement Integrated Safety Drive Is Out-of-box and Safety Signature Exists
1. Remove and replace the existing integrated safety drive.

2. Right-click the replacement drive and choose Properties.
The General tab appears in Module Properties dialog box.
3. Click to the right of the safety network number.

The Safety Network Number dialog box appears.
4. Click Set.
5. Verify that the Network Status (NET) status indicator is alternating
red/green on the correct drive.
6. Click Yes to set the SNN and accept the replacement drive.
IMPORTANT Follow your company-prescribed procedures to functionally test the

replacement drive and system and to authorize the system for use.

Scenario 2- Replacement Integrated Safety Drive SNN Is Different from Original and Safety
Signature Exists

4. Click Reset Ownership.

5. Click OK.
The General tab appears in Module Properties dialog box.
7. Click to the right of the safety network number.

The Safety Network Number dialog box appears.
8. Click Set.
9. Verify that the Network Status (NET) status indicator is alternating
red/green on the correct drive.


Scenario 3- Replacement Integrated Safety Drive SNN Is Different from Original and No
Safety Signature Exists


5. Click OK.

Replacement with Configure Always Enabled
ATTENTION: Enable the Configure Always feature only if the entire

integrated safety control system is not being relied on to maintain SIL 3
behavior during the replacement and functional testing of a 2198-Hxxx-ERS2
servo drive. Do not place drives that are in the out-of-box condition on an
integrated safety network when the Configure Always feature is enabled,
except while following this replacement procedure.
When the Configure Always feature is enabled, the controller automatically

checks for and connects to a replacement drive that meets all of the following
requirements:
• The controller has configuration data for a compatible drive at that
network address
• The drive is in out-of-box condition or has an SNN that matches the
configuration

If the project is configured for Configure Always, follow the appropriate steps
to replace a 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive.
Follow these steps when the Configure Always feature is enabled.

If Then
The drive is in out-of-box condition Go to step .
No action is needed for the GuardLogix controller to take
ownership of the drive.
An SNN mismatch error occurs Go to the next step to reset the drive to out-of-box condition.


5. Click OK.


Motion Direct Commands in You can use the Motion Direct Command (MDC) feature to initiate motion
while the controller is in Program mode, independent of application code that
Motion Control Systems is executed in Run mode. These commands let you do a variety of functions, for
example, move an axis, jog an axis, or home an axis.
A typical use might involve a machine integrator testing different parts of the
motion system while the machine is being commissioned or a maintenance
engineer, under certain restricted scenarios in accordance with safe machine
operating procedures, wanting to move an axis (like a conveyor) to clear a jam
before resuming normal operation.
ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury or damage to equipment, follow these

rules regarding Run mode and Program mode.
• Only authorized, trained personnel with knowledge of safe machine
operation should be allowed to use Motion Direct Commands
• Additional supervisory methods, like removing the controller key switch,
should be used to maintain the safety integrity of the system after returning
the safety controller to RUN mode
Understanding STO Bypass When Using Motion Direct Commands
If a Safety-only connection between the GuardLogix safety controller and the

2198-Hxxx-ERS2 servo drive was established at least once after the drive was
received from the factory, the drive does not allow motion while the safety
controller is in Program mode by default.
This is because the safety task is not executed while the GuardLogix safety
controller is in Program mode. This applies to applications running in a single-
safety controller (with Motion and Safety connections). When an integrated
safety drive has a Motion connection to a standard controller and a separate
Safety connection to a dual-safety controller, the standard controller can
transition to Program mode while the safety controller stays in Run mode and
continues to execute the safety task.
However, 2198-Hxxx-ERS2 drive systems are designed with a bypass feature

for the STO function in single-safety controller configurations. You can use the
MDC feature to allow motion while following all the necessary and prescribed
steps per machine safety operating procedures.
ATTENTION: Consider the consequences of allowing motion through the use of

MDC when the controller is in Program mode. You must acknowledge warning
messages in the Logix Designer application that warn of the drive bypassing the
STO function and unintended motion can occur. The integrated safety drive does
not respond to the request of STO function if MDC mode is entered.
ATTENTION: It is your responsibility to maintain machine safety integrity while
executing motion direct commands. One alternative is to provide ladder logic for
Machine Maintenance mode that leaves the controller in Run mode with safety
functions executing.

Logix Designer Application Warning Messages
When the controller is in Run mode, executing safety functions, the

2198-Hxxx-ERS2 drive follows the commands that it receives from the safety
controller. Safety state = Running, Axis state = Stopped/Running, as shown in
Figure 81.
Figure 81 - Safety State Indications When Controller is in Run Mode (safety task executing)
When the controller transitions to Program mode, the integrated safety drive is
in the safe state (torque not permitted). Safety state = Not Running, Axis state
= Start Inhibited, as shown in Figure 82).
Figure 82 - Safety State Indications After Controller Transitions to Program Mode

When you issue a motion direct command to an axis to produce torque in

Program mode, for example MSO or MDS, with the safety connection present
to the drive, a warning message is presented before the motion direct command
is executed, as shown in Figure 83.
Figure 83 - STO Bypass Prompt When the Safety Controller is in Program Mode
The warning in Figure 83 is displayed the first time a motion direct command
is issued.
After you acknowledge the warning message by clicking Yes, torque is

permitted by the drive and a warning message is indicated in the software as
shown in Figure 84. Safety state = Not Running (torque permitted), Axis state
= Stopped/Running, Persistent Warning = Safe Torque Off Bypassed.
IMPORTANT Switch the controller to Run mode to exit Motion Direct Command mode
with STO function bypassed.
Figure 84 - Safety State Indications After Controller Transitions to Program Mode

(MDC executing)

IMPORTANT The persistent warning message text Safe Torque Off bypassed appears
when a motion direct command is executed.
Warning message persists even after the dialog is closed and reopened
as long as the integrated safety drive is in STO Bypass mode.
The persistent warning message is removed only after the integrated
safety drive is restored to the Safe state.
Torque Permitted in a Multi-workstation Environment
The warning in Figure 85 is displayed to notify a second user working in a

multi-workstation environment that the first user has placed the integrated
safety drive in the STO state and that the current action is about to bypass the
STO state and permit torque.
Figure 85 - STO Bypass Prompt When MDC is Issued in Multi-workstation Environment
Warning Icon and Text in Axis Properties
In addition to the other warnings that require your acknowledgement, the

Logix Designer application also provides warning icons and persistent warning
messages in other Axis Properties dialog boxes when the integrated safety drive
is in STO Bypass mode.
Figure 86 - Axis and Safe State Indications on the Hookup Services Dialog Box

Figure 87 - Axis and Safe State Indications on Motion Direct Commands Dialog Box
Figure 88 - Axis and Safe State Indications on the Motion Console Dialog Box

Functional Safety Considerations
ATTENTION: Before maintenance work can be performed in Program mode,

the developer of the application must consider the implications of allowing
motion through motion direct commands and should consider developing
logic for run-time maintenance operations to meet the requirements of
machine safety operating procedures.
ATTENTION: Motion is allowed when motion direct commands are used in

Program mode and STO function is not available.
Motion direct commands issued when the controller is in Program mode
causes the drive to bypass the STO Active condition.
It is your responsibility to implement additional preventive measures to
maintain safety integrity of the machinery during execution of motion direct
commands in Program mode.
ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury and damage to equipment in the event

of unauthorized access or unexpected motion during authorized access,
return the controller to RUN mode and remove the key before leaving the
machine unattended.

Safe Torque-off To maintain safety rating, Kinetix 5500 drives must be installed inside
protected control panels or cabinets appropriate for the environmental
Specifications conditions of the industrial location. The protection class of the panel or
cabinet must be IP54 or higher.
Table 76 - Safe Torque-off Network Specifications

Attribute Value Logix Designer Tag Name
Safety connection RPI, min 6 ms N/A
Input assembly connections 3 N/A
Output assembly connections 1 N/A
Integrated safety open request support Type 1 and Type 2 requests N/A
Bit 0: Safety fault Axis.SafetyFaultStatus
Bit 1: Safety reset request Axis.SafetyResetRequestStatus
Bit 2: Safety Reset Required Axis.SafetyResetRequiredStatus
Axis safety status
Bit 3: Safe torque-off active Axis.SafeTorqueOffActiveStatus
Bit 4: Safe torque disabled Axis.SafeTorqueDisabledStatus
Bit 5…31: Undefined (0) N/A
Bit 1: Safety core fault Axis.SafetyCoreFault
Axis safety faults Bit 3: Safe torque-off fault Axis.SafeTorqueOffFault
All others: Undefined (0) N/A
Table 77 - Safe Torque-off Assembly Specifications

Attribute Instance Attribute Value Logix Designer Tag Name
Bit 0: Torque disabled Drv:SI.TorqueDisabled
Safety input 0X1A0 Bit 6: Safety fault Drv:SI.SafetyFault
assembly
Bit 7: Reset required Drv:SI.ResetRequired
Safety output Bit 0: Safe torque-off output Drv:SO.SafeTorqueOff

0X180
assembly Bit 7: Reset request Drv:SO.Reset

Notes:

Appendix A
Interconnect Diagrams
This appendix provides wiring examples and system block diagrams for your
Kinetix 5500 system components.
Topic Page
Interconnect Diagram Notes 201
Power Wiring Examples 202
Bus-sharing Wiring Examples 204
Shunt Resistor Wiring Example 206
Kinetix 5500 Drive and Motor/Actuator Wiring Examples 207
System Block Diagrams 212
Interconnect Diagram Notes This appendix provides wiring examples to assist you in wiring the
Kinetix 5500 drive system. These notes apply to the wiring examples on the
pages that follow.
Table 78 - Interconnect Diagram Notes
Note Information
1 For power wiring specifications, refer to Wiring Requirements on page 80.
2 For input fuse and circuit breaker sizes, refer to Circuit Breaker/Fuse Selection on page 33.
3 AC (EMC) line filter is required for EMC compliance. Place line filter as close to the drive as possible and do not route very dirty wires in wireway. If routing in wireway is
unavoidable, use shielded cable with shields grounded to the drive chassis and filter case. For AC line filter specifications, refer to Kinetix Servo Drives Specifications
Technical Data, publication GMC-TD003.
4 Terminal block is required to make connections.
5 Cable shield clamp must be used to meet CE requirements.
6 PE ground connection bonded to the panel must be used to meet CE requirements.
7 DC connector covered with protective knockout is default configuration. Remove knockout to insert DC bus T-connector and bus-bars. Do not attach discrete wiring to the
DC bus terminals is.
8 Internal shunt wired to the RC connector is default configuration. Remove internal shunt wires to attach external shunt wires.
9 Default configuration for ground screws is for grounded power at user site. For ungrounded or corner-grounded power, remove the screws. Refer to Determine the Input
Power Configuration on page 73 for more information.
10 ATTENTION: Implementation of safety circuits and risk assessment is the responsibility of the machine builder. Please
reference international standards ISO 14121-1 and EN ISO 13849-1 estimation and safety performance categories. For
more information refer to Understanding the Machinery Directive, publication SHB-900.
11 For motor cable specifications, refer to Kinetix Motion Accessories Specifications Technical Data, publication KNX-TD004.
12 MPL-A15xx…MPL-A45xx, MPM-A115xx…MPM-A130xx, MPF-A3xx…MPF-A45xx, MPS-Axxx, MPAR-Axxx, MPAS-Axxx, and LDAT-Sxx-xBx encoders use the +5V DC
supply.

Appendix A Interconnect Diagrams
Table 78 - Interconnect Diagram Notes (continued)

Note Information
13 MPL-Bxx, MPL-A5xx, MPM-Bxx, MPM-A165xx…MPM-A215xx, MPF-Bxx, MPF-A5xx, MPS-Bxxx, MPAR-Bxxx, MPAS-Bxxx, and LDAT-Sxx-xDx encoders use the +9V DC
supply.
14 Brake connector pins are labeled plus (+) and minus (-) or F and G respectively. Power connector pins are labeled U, V, W, and (GND) or A, B, C, and (D)
respectively.
15 LDAT-Series linear thrusters do not have a brake option, so only the 2090-CPWM7DF-xxAAxx or 2090-CPWM7DF-xxAFxx motor power cables apply.
Power Wiring Examples You must supply input power components. The single-phase and three-phase
line filters are wired downstream of the circuit protection.
Single-axis Drive Wiring Examples

Figure 89 - Kinetix 5500 Drives Power Wiring (three-phase operation)
2198-Hxxx-ERSx
Refer to table on page 201 for note information. Kinetix 5500 Drives
Bonded Cabinet Ground Bus * PE Ground

Chassis Note 6
Note 4
Customer Supplied 2 Note 5
24V_COM Control Power
+24V DC 1 (CP) Connector Cable Shield
Power Supply * +24V Clamp
4
U Three-phase
4 3
Motor Power V Motor Power
2198-DBxx-F 3 Mains AC Input 2 Connections
195…264V AC rms or Three-phase L3 (MP) Connector W
(IPD) Connector 1 Note 11
324…528V AC rms AC Line Filter 2
L2
Three-phase Input Note 3 1
Notes 1, 2 L1
Circuit Protection *
Note 2
2 MBRK -
Motor Brake MBRK - Motor Brake
DC+ DC Bus (BC) Connector 1 MBRK + Connections
(DC) Connector MBRK +
DC-
Note 7
Motor Feedback 1 DATA +/EPWR+ Motor Feedback

D+
(MF) Connector 2 Connections
DC+ Shunt D- DATA -/EPWR- (refer to Figure 97)
SH (RC) Connector
Internal Shunt
Note 8 1
IN1
Digital Input 2 Registration and
COM Home Input
(IOD) Connector 3
IN2 Connections
* Indicates User Supplied Component 4
SHLD
Ground Screws
Note 9

Interconnect Diagrams Appendix A
Figure 90 - Kinetix 5500 Drives Power Wiring (single-phase operation)
2198-H003-ERSx, 2198-H008-ERSx, or
Refer to table on page 201 for note information. 2198-H015-ERSx
Kinetix 5500 Drives
Chassis Note 6
Note 4
Customer Supplied 2 Note 5
24V_COM Control Power
+24V DC 1 (CP) Connector Cable Shield
Power Supply * +24V Clamp
4
U Three-phase
4 3
2198-DBxx-F 3 Mains AC Input 2 Connections
Three-phase L3 (MP) Connector W
(IPD) Connector 1 Note 11
195…264V AC rms AC Line Filter 2
L2
Single-phase Input Note 3 1
Notes 1, 2 L1
Note 2
Motor Brake MBRK - 2 MBRK -
DC Bus Motor Brake
DC+ (DC) Connector (BC) Connector 1 MBRK + Connections
(does not apply in MBRK +
DC-
single-phase operation)
Motor Feedback D+ 1 DATA +/EPWR+ Motor Feedback

(MF) Connector 2 Connections
DC+ Shunt D- DATA -/EPWR- (refer to Figure 97)
SH
(RC) Connector
Internal Shunt
Note 8 1
IN1
Digital Input 2 Registration and
(IOD) Connector COM 3
Home Input
IN2 Connections
* Indicates User Supplied Component 4
SHLD
Ground Screws
Note 9
Figure 91 - Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module
2198-Hxxx-ERSx 2198-CAPMOD-1300
Kinetix 5500 Drive Capacitor Module
Refer to table on page 201 for note information.
PE Ground
Bonded Cabinet Ground Bus * Note 6
PE Ground
Chassis Note 6
Customer Supplied 2
+24V DC 24V_COM 24V_COM Control Power
Note 4 1 (CP) Connectors
Power Supply * +24V +24V
4
2198-DBxx-F 3 Motor, digital input, and 2
195…264V AC rms or Three-phase L3 Module Status RELAY- Relay output to Logix5000
2 shunt connections not controller to monitor
324…528V AC rms AC Line Filter L2 shown for clarity. (MS) Connector 1
Three-phase Input RELAY+ capacitor module status.
Note 3 1
L1
Notes 1, 2
Note 2
DC+ DC+ DC Bus

(DC) Connectors
DC- DC-
* Indicates User Supplied Component 2198-H0x0-ADP-IN 2198-H0x0-DP-T

Bus Bar Connectors Bus Bar Connectors

Bus-sharing Wiring Examples
For bus-sharing configurations, use the 2198-H0x0-xx-x shared-bus

connection system to extend power from drive to drive.
Figure 92 - Kinetix 5500 Drives with Shared AC Bus
2198-Hxxx-ERSx 2198-Hxxx-ERSx 2198-Hxxx-ERSx

Kinetix 5500 Drive Kinetix 5500 Drive Kinetix 5500 Drive
PE Ground
Note 6
Note 6
PE Ground
Note 6
Chassis
Customer Supplied 2 Control Power

24V_COM 24V_COM 24V_COM
Note 4 +24V DC 1 (CP) Connectors
Power Supply * +24V +24V +24V
4
2198-DBxx-F 3
195…264V AC rms or Three-phase L3 L3 L3 Three-phase Input
324…528V AC rms AC Line Filter 2 (IPD) Connectors
Three-phase Input L2 L2 L2
Note 3 1
Notes 1, 2 L1 L1 L1
Note 2
DC+ DC+ DC+ DC Bus

DC- DC- DC- (DC) Connectors
* Indicates User Supplied Component 2198-H0x0-ADP-IN 2198-H0x0-AP-T 2198-H0x0-AP-T

Bus Bar Connectors Bus Bar Connectors Bus Bar Connectors
Figure 93 - Kinetix 5500 Drives with Shared AC/DC Bus
Refer to table on page 201 for note information. 2198-Hxxx-ERSx 2198-Hxxx-ERSx 2198-Hxxx-ERSx
PE Ground
Note 6
Bonded Cabinet Ground Bus *
PE Ground
Note 6
PE Ground
Chassis Note 6
Customer Supplied 2
Note 4 24V_COM 24V_COM 24V_COM Control Power
+24V DC 1 (CP) Connectors
4
195…264V AC rms or 2198-DBxx-F 3
Three-phase L3 L3 L3 Three-phase Input
324…528V AC rms 2 (IPD) Connectors
Three-phase Input AC Line Filter L2 L2 L2
Notes 1, 2 Note 3 1
L1 L1 L1
Note 2
DC+ DC+ DC+ DC Bus

(DC) Connectors
DC- DC- DC-
2198-H0x0-ADP-IN 2198-H0x0-ADP-T 2198-H0x0-ADP-T

* Indicates User Supplied Component Bus Bar Connectors Bus Bar Connectors Bus Bar Connectors

Figure 94 - Kinetix 5500 Drives with Shared DC (common bus)
2198-Hxxx-ERSx 2198-Hxxx-ERSx 2198-Hxxx-ERSx

PE Ground
Note 6
Note 6
PE Ground
Note 6
Chassis
Customer Supplied 2 Control Power

24V_COM 24V_COM 24V_COM
Note 4 +24V DC 1 (CP) Connectors
4
2198-DBxx-F 3
195…264V AC rms or Three-phase L3 Three-phase Input L3 L3
324…528V AC rms AC Line Filter 2 (IPD) Connector
Three-phase Input L2 L2 L2
Note 3 1
Notes 1, 2 L1 L1 L1
Note 2
DC+ DC+ DC+ DC Bus

DC- DC-
(DC) Connectors
DC-
* Indicates User Supplied Component 2198-H0x0-ADP-IN 2198-H0x0-DP-T 2198-H0x0-DP-T

Bus Bar Connectors Bus Bar Connectors Bus Bar Connectors
Figure 95 - Kinetix 5500 Drives with Shared AC/DC Hybrid Bus
Refer to table on page 201 for note information. 2198-Hxxx-ERSx 2198-Hxxx-ERSx 2198-Hxxx-ERSx
PE Ground
Note 6
Bonded Cabinet Ground Bus *
PE Ground
Note 6
PE Ground
Chassis Note 6
Customer Supplied 2
Note 4 24V_COM 24V_COM 24V_COM Control Power
+24V DC 1 (CP) Connectors
4
2198-DBxx-F 3
195…264V AC rms or Three-phase L3 L3 Three-phase Input L3
324…528V AC rms AC Line Filter 2 (IPD) Connector
L2 L2 L2
Three-phase Input Note 3 1
Notes 1, 2 L1 L1 L1
Note 2
DC+ DC+ DC+ DC Bus

(DC) Connectors
DC- DC- DC-
2198-H0x0-ADP-IN 2198-H0x0-ADP-T 2198-H0x0-DP-T

* Indicates User Supplied Component Bus Bar Connectors Bus Bar Connectors Bus Bar Connectors

Shunt Resistor Wiring Refer to the External Passive-shunt Resistor Connections on page 101 for the
Bulletin 2097 external shunt resistor catalog numbers available for
Example Kinetix 5500 servo drives.
IMPORTANT Before wiring the Bulletin 2097 external shunt to the RC connector, remove
the wires from the servo drive internal shunt. Do not connect internal and
external shunt resistors to the drive.
Figure 96 - Shunt Resistor Wiring Example
2198-Hxxx-ERSx 2097-Rx
Kinetix 5500 Drive Shunt
Resistor
Shunt (RC) DC+
Connector SH
Internal Shunt
Refer to the Kinetix 300 Shunt Resistor Installation Instructions, publication

2097-IN002, for shunt resistor installation instructions.

Kinetix 5500 Drive and The Kinetix VP motors use single cable technology. The motor power, brake,
and feedback wires are all packaged in a single cable.
Motor/Actuator Wiring
Examples Figure 97 - Kinetix 5500 Drives with Kinetix VP Motors (Bulletin VPL, VPF, and VPS)
2198-Hxxx-ERSx VPL-A/Bxxxx-C/P Motors

Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives Refer to table on page 201 for note information. VPF-A/Bxxxx-C/P Motors
or VPS-BxxxD-P Motors
with High Resolution
Note 5 Feedback
Cable Shield
Clamp
4 Brown A/U
U
3 Black B/V Three-phase
Motor Power V
(MP) Connector 2 Blue C/W Motor Power
W
1 Green/Yellow
Note 14
1 Black F/+
Motor Brake MBRK + Motor
(BC) Connector 2 White G/– Brake
MBRK -
1 Blue Data+/EPWR+ E/1

Motor Feedback D+ Motor
(MF) Connector 2 White/Blue Data-/EPWR- H/2 Feedback
D-
Shield
2198-KITCON-DSL
Connector Kit 2090-CSBM1DE-xxAAxx
or 2090-CSBM1DE-xxAFxx
or
2090-CSBM1DG-xxAAxx
or 2090-CSBM1DG-xxAFxx SpeedTec DIN
Single Motor Cable Single Motor Connector
Note 11
Power, Brake, and
Feedback Connector
2090-CSxM1DF cables have flying-lead conductors designed specifically for

Kinetix 5500 servo drives. 2090-CSxM1DG cables have flying-leads that are
longer than 2090-CSxM1DF cables to accommodate Kinetix 5500 or
Figure 98 - Grounding Technique for Feedback Cable Shield

Mounting Screws (2)
Cover
2198-KITCON-DSL
Feedback Connector Kit
Clamp Screws (2)

Exposed Shield
Connector
Plug
Refer to Kinetix 5500 Feedback Connector
Kit Installation Instructions, publication
2198-IN002, for connector kit specifications. Feedback Cable Grounding Plate
(EPWR+, EPWR-)

Compatible Allen-Bradley rotary motors (Bulletin MPL, MPM, MPF, and

MPS) and linear actuators (Bulletin MPAS, MPAR, MPAI, and LDAT-Series)
have separate connectors and cables for power/brake and feedback
connections.
Figure 99 - Kinetix 5500 with MP-Series Rotary Motors
MPL-A15xx…MPL-A5xx, Refer to table on page 201 for note information.

2198-Hxxx-ERSx MPL-B15xx…MPL-B6xx,
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives MPM-A/Bxxx, MPF-A/Bxxx, and
MPS-A/Bxxx Servo Motors with
High Resolution Feedback
2198-H2DCK Feedback
Cable Shield Converter Kit
Clamp
Note 5 Shield
1 BLACK SIN+ 1
4 Brown A U 2 WHT/BLACK SIN- 2
U Three-phase
3 Black B V 3 RED COS+ 3
(MP) Connector 2 Blue C W 4 WHT/RED COS- 4
W
1 Green/Yellow D 5 GREEN DATA+ 5
Motor 6 WHT/GREEN DATA- 10
2090-CPxM7DF-xxAAxx GND
(standard) or Feedback 9 GRAY +5VDC 14
2090-CPxM7DF-xxAFxx 10 WHT/GRAY ECOM 6
(continuous-flex) Note 14
Motor Power Cable 11 ORANGE +9VDC 7
Note 11 Thermostat 13 WHT/ORANGE TS+ 11
1 F MBRK+ 14 BLUE TS-

Black
Motor Brake MBRK +
(BC) Connector 2 White G MBRK-
MBRK - 12 COM
Motor Brake Refer to DSL feedback converter kit
illustration (lower left)
for proper grounding technique.
1
Motor Feedback D+ 2090-CFBM7DF-CEAAxx (standard) or
(MF) Connector 2 2090-CFBM7DF-CEAFxx (continuous-flex)
D-
(flying-lead) Feedback Cable
Notes 11, 12, 13
Grounding Technique for SpeedTec DIN

Feedback Cable Shield Motor Connectors
2198-H2DCK
Hiperface-to-DSL Feedback Connector Power Connector
Feedback Converter Kit
14 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Clamp Screws (2)
Exposed shield secured Cable Clamp

Refer to Hiperface to DSL Feedback Converter Kit Installation Instructions,
under clamp. publication 2198-IN006, for converter kit specifications.

Figure 100 - Kinetix 5500 with LDAT-Series Linear Thrusters
2198-Hxxx-ERSx LDAT-Sxxxxxx-xDx
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives Linear Thrusters with Refer to table on page 201 for note information.
2198-H2DCK Feedback
Clamp
Note 5 Shield 1
1 BLACK SIN+
U
3 Black B V Three-phase 3 RED COS+ 3
Motor Power V
(MP) Connector 2 Blue C W Motor Power 4 WHT/RED COS- 4
W
2090-CPWM7DF-xxAAxx GND
(standard) or Feedback 9 GRAY +5VDC 14
2090-CPWM7DF-xxAFxx 10 WHT/GRAY ECOM 6
(continuous-flex) 11 ORANGE +9VDC 7
Motor Power Cable
Thermostat 13 WHT/ORANGE TS+ 11
Notes 11, 15
14 BLUE TS-
Motor Brake MBRK +
(BC) Connector 12 COM
MBRK -
Refer to DSL feedback converter kit
1 for proper grounding technique.
(MF) Connector 2
D- 2090-CFBM7DF-CEAFxx (continuous-flex)
Notes 11, 12, 13
SpeedTec DIN
Grounding Technique for Motor Connectors
Feedback Cable Shield 2198-H2DCK
14 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Clamp Screws (2)

Exposed shield secured Cable Clamp publication 2198-IN006, for converter kit specifications.
under clamp.

Figure 101 - Kinetix 5500 with MP-Series Linear Stages
2198-Hxxx-ERSx MPAS-A/Bxxxxx-VxxSxA
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives Ballscrew Linear Stages with Refer to table on page 201 for note information.
2198-H2DCK Feedback
Clamp
Note 5 Shield 1
1 BLACK SIN+
U
Motor Power V
W
6 WHT/GREEN DATA- 10
2090-CPxM7DF-xxAAxx GND Motor +5VDC 14
(standard) or Feedback 9 GRAY
2090-CPxM7DF-xxAFxx 10 WHT/GRAY ECOM 6
(continuous-flex) 11 ORANGE +9VDC 7
Motor Power Cable
Notes 11
1 F MBRK+ 14 BLUE TS-

Black
Motor Brake MBRK +
MBRK - 12 COM
1 for proper grounding technique.
(MF) Connector 2
D- 2090-CFBM7DF-CEAFxx (continuous-flex)
Notes 11, 12, 13
SpeedTec DIN
Grounding Technique for Motor Connectors
Feedback Cable Shield 2198-H2DCK
14 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Clamp Screws (2)

under clamp.

Figure 102 - Kinetix 5500 with MP-Series Electric Cylinders
2198-Hxxx-ERSx MPAR-A/Bxxxxx and Refer to table on page 201 for note information.
Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives MPAI-A/Bxxxxx
Electric Cylinders with
2198-H2DCK Feedback
Cable Shield High Resolution Feedback
Converter Kit
Clamp
Note 5 Shield 1
1 BLACK SIN+
U
Motor Power V
W
Refer to Table 79 for GND +5VDC 14
Feedback 9 GRAY
motor power cable. 10 WHT/GRAY ECOM 6
Notes 11
11 ORANGE +9VDC 7
1 F 14 BLUE TS-
Black MBRK+
Motor Brake MBRK +
MBRK - 12 COM
for proper grounding technique.
1
Motor Feedback D+ Refer to Table 79 for
(MF) Connector 2 (flying-lead) motor feedback cable.
D-
Notes 11, 12, 13
Grounding Technique for SpeedTec DIN

Feedback Cable Shield Motor Connectors
2198-H2DCK
14 11 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Clamp Screws (2)

under clamp.
Table 79 - MP-Series Electric Cylinder Power and Feedback Cables

Frame
MP-Series Electric Cylinder Power Cable Feedback Cable

Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
MPAR-A/B1xxx (series A) 32 2090-XXNPMF-16Sxx (standard) or 2090-XXNFMF-Sxx (standard) or
MPAR-A/B2xxx (series A) 40 2090-CPxM4DF-16AFxx (continuous-flex) 2090-CFBM4DF-CDAFxx (continuous-flex)
MPAR-A/B1xxx (series B) 32
MPAR-A/B2xxx (series B) 40
MPAR-A/B3xxx 63
2090-CPxM7DF-16AAxx (standard) or 2090-CFBM7DF-CEAAxx (standard) or
MPAI-A/B2xxxx 64 2090-CPxM7DF-16AFxx (continuous-flex) 2090-CFBM7DF-CEAFxx (continuous-flex)
MPAI-A/B3xxxx 83
MPAI-A/B4xxxx 110
MPAI-B5xxxx 144
2090-CPxM7DF-14AAxx (standard) or 2090-CFBM7DF-CEAAxx (standard) or
MPAI-A5xxxx 144 2090-CPxM7DF-14AFxx (continuous-flex) 2090-CFBM7DF-CEAFxx (continuous-flex)

212
Appendix A
Internal or External
Shunt Resitor
DC Bus Connector Shunt Connector

LCD Display DC+ DC- DC+ SH
Interconnect Diagrams
U
System Block Diagrams
Module Status V Three-phase

Status Indicators
Network Status Motor Poewr
W Connector
L1
Motor Cable
Three-phase Input L2 Clamp
Power Connector L3
AC Ground Jumper DC Ground Jumper

Chassis
Safe Torque-off
Connector
Figure 103 - Kinetix 5500 Drive Block Diagram
24V+ Switched Mode Power Supply

24V Control Control Board Digital Inputs
Power Connector Control Power Connector
24V- Encoder Power
Ethernet PORT1
Ethernet PORT2
Motor Feedback
Connector
Motor Brake
Connector
This section provides block diagrams of the Kinetix 5500 drive modules.
Figure 104 - Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module Block Diagram
Protection Precharge
Relay K2
DC+
Fuse F2
Relay K1
Capacitor Bank
DC Bus
Connector 1360 μF
DC-
24V+
24V Control Power SMPS
24V-
Module Status RELAY+

Connector
(NO relay output)
RELAY-
Status Indicator
Chassis

Notes:

Appendix B
Upgrade the Drive Firmware
This appendix provides procedures for upgrading firmware by using

ControlFLASH software.
Topic Page
Before You Begin 216
Upgrade Firmware 219
Verify the Firmware Upgrade 223
Upgrading drive firmware by using ControlFLASH software involves

configuring your Logix5000 controller communication, selecting the drive to
upgrade, and upgrading the firmware.
IMPORTANT If the drive firmware contains updated safety firmware, you must de-
energize the safety inputs first or the upgrade fails.
To update the drive firmware in Feedback Only mode, you must inhibit the
axis first. Refer to Inhibit Feedback Only Axis on page 218 for more
information.

Appendix B Upgrade the Drive Firmware
Before You Begin These are the minimum firmware revisions and software versions required for
upgrading drive firmware.
Table 80 - Kinetix 5500 System Requirements

Description Firmware Revision
Logix Designer application 21.00 or later
RSLinx software 2.58 or later
ControlFLASH software kit (1) 11.00 or later
Catalog numbers of the targeted Kinetix 5500 drive module you want to upgrade.
Network path to the targeted Kinetix 5500 drive module you want to upgrade.
(1) Download the ControlFLASH kit from http://support.rockwellautomation.com/controlflash. Contact Rockwell Automation
Technical Support at (440) 646-5800 for assistance.
For more ControlFLASH information (not drive specific), refer to the ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade Kit Quick Start, publication
1756-QS105.
ATTENTION: To avoid personal injury or damage to equipment during the

firmware upgrade due to unpredictable motor activity, do not apply three-
phase AC or common-bus DC input power to the drive.
IMPORTANT Control power must be present at CP-1 (24V+) and CP-2 (24V-) prior to
upgrading your target drive. The axis state on the LCD display must be
STANDBY, CONFIGURING, STOPPED, or PRECHARGE before beginning this
procedure.

Upgrade the Drive Firmware Appendix B
Configure Logix5000 Controller Communication
This procedure assumes that your communication method to the Logix5000

controller is the Ethernet network. It also assumes that your Logix5000
Ethernet module or controller has already been configured.
For more controller information, refer to Additional Resources on page 13.
Follow these steps to configure Logix5000 controller communication.
1. Open your RSLinx Classic software.

2. From the Communications menu, choose Configure Drivers.
The Configure Drivers dialog box appears.
3. From the Available Driver Types pull-down menu, choose Ethernet

devices.
4. Click Add New.
The Add New RSLinx Classic Driver dialog box appears.
5. Type the new driver name.
6. Click OK.
The Configure driver dialog box appears.

7. Type the IP address of your Kinetix 5500 servo drive.

8. Click OK.
The new Ethernet driver appears under Configured Drivers.
9. Click Close.
10. Minimize the RSLinx application dialog box.
Inhibit Feedback Only Axis
If an axis is configured as Feedback Only, you must inhibit the axis prior to
performing the firmware upgrade. Follow these steps to inhibit an axis.
1. Open your Logix Designer application.

2. Right-click the 2198-Hxxx-ERSx
servo drive you configured as
Feedback Only and choose Properties.
The Module Properties dialog box
appears.
3. Click the Connection tab.
4. Check Inhibit Module.

5. Click OK.
6. Save your file and download the program to the controller.

Upgrade Firmware Follow these steps to select the drive module to upgrade.
1. In the Logix Designer application, from the Tools menu, choose

ControlFLASH.
TIP You can also open ControlFLASH software by choosing
Start>Programs>FLASH Programming Tools>ControlFLASH.
The Welcome to ControlFLASH dialog box appears.
2. Click Next.
The Catalog Number dialog box appears.

3. Select your drive module.

In this example, the 2198-H003-ERS servo drive is selected.
4. Click Next.
The Select Device to Update dialog box appears.
5. Expand your Ethernet node, Logix backplane, and EtherNet/IP

network module.
6. Select the servo drive to upgrade.
7. Click OK.
The Firmware Revision dialog box appears.
8. Select the firmware revision to upgrade.

9. Click Next.

The Summary dialog box appears.
10. Confirm the drive catalog number and firmware revision.

11. Click Finish.
This ControlFLASH warning dialog box appears.
12. Click Yes (only if you are ready).

This ControlFLASH warning dialog box appears.
13. Acknowledge the warning and click OK.

The Progress dialog box appears

and updating begins.
The axis state on the LCD display changes from CONFIGURING,

STOPPED, or PRECHARGE to FIRMWARE UPDATE, which
indicates that the upgrade is in progress.
After the upgrade information is
sent to the drive, the drive resets
and performs diagnostic
checking.
14. Wait for the Progress dialog box
to time out.
It is normal for this process to
take several minutes.
IMPORTANT Do not cycle power to the drive during this process or the firmware
upgrade does not complete successfully.
15. Verify that the Update Status dialog box appears and indicates success or
failure as described below.
Upgrading Status If
Update complete appears in a GREEN Status dialog box, then go to
Success step 16.
Update failure appears in a RED Status dialog box, then refer to
Failure ControlFLASH Firmware Upgrade Kit Quick Start, publication 1756-
QS105, for troubleshooting information.
16. Click OK.
IMPORTANT If you are upgrading a feedback-only axis and you checked Inhibit
Module on the Connection tab in Module Properties, you must clear the
Inhibit Module checkbox before resuming normal operation.

Verify the Firmware Upgrade Follow these steps to verify your firmware upgrade was successful.
TIP Verifying the firmware upgrade is optional.
1. Open your RSLinx software.

2. From the Communications menu, choose RSWho.
3. Expand your Ethernet node, Logix backplane, and EtherNet/IP

network module.
4. Right-click the drive module and choose Device Properties.
The Device Properties dialog box appears.
5. Verify the new firmware revision level.

6. Click Close.

Notes:

Appendix C
Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
This appendix provides information and examples for sizing your Kinetix 5500
drive shared-bus configurations.
Topic Page
Shared-bus Configurations 225
Power Sharing Sizing Examples 230
Control Power Current Calculations 232
Energy Calculations 234
Shared-bus configurations include the following types:

• Shared AC
• Shared DC (common bus)
• Shared AC/DC
• Shared AC/DC Hybrid
These restrictions apply to all shared-bus configurations:

• Shared-bus configurations must use the shared-bus connection system.
IMPORTANT Do not make drive-to-drive connections with discrete wires.
• Single-phase drive operation is not supported.

• Shared AC/DC and shared AC/DC hybrid configurations result in a
derating of 30% of the total converter power available.
• The zero-stack tabs and cutouts must be engaged from drive-to-drive.
Systems cannot start in one cabinet and end in another.
• Program drives for the same converter AC input voltage.
Shared-bus Configurations Shared AC configurations are configured as Standalone in the project file and
do not share these restrictions that apply to multi-axis shared-bus
configurations:
• All drives in a bus-sharing group must be configured with the same bus
power-sharing group number in the Logix Designer application.
• The maximum number of drives in any bus power-sharing group cannot
exceed eight.

Appendix C Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations
Shared AC Configurations
In shared AC configurations, the first (leftmost) drive receives AC input

voltage. The shared-bus connection system extends the AC bus to all
downstream drives:
• All drives are configured in the project file as Standalone drives.
• Drives must be of the same power rating (catalog number).
• Shared AC configurations do not support Bulletin 2198 capacitor
modules.
• The maximum number of drives in Shared AC configurations is
restricted as described in Table 81.
Table 81 - Shared AC Panel Layout

Drive Cat. No. Frame Size Number of Drives Configured as Shared AC, max
2198-H003-ERSx
1 5
2198-H008-ERSx
2198-H015-ERSx
2198-H025-ERSx 2 3
2198-H040-ERSx
2198-H070-ERSx 3 2
Figure 105 - Typical Shared AC Configuration

Bonded Cabinet Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives
Ground (top view)
Do not remove the protective

Three-phase knock-out DC connector cover.
Input Power
24V Input
Control Power
For an example shared AC installation with additional details, refer to Typical

Shared AC Installations on page 18.
Shared DC Configurations
In a Shared DC (DC common bus) configuration, the first (leftmost) drive is

the leader drive and is the only drive that receives the AC input voltage. All
drives to the right of the leader drives are follower drives. They receive the DC
bus voltage extended from the leader drive through the shared-bus connection
system:
• For DC common-bus installations, the power rating of the leader drive
must be greater than or equal to the power rating of the follower drives.
• The leader drive is configured in the project file as Shared AC/DC.
• The follower drives are configured in the project file as Shared DC.
• Shared DC configurations support Bulletin 2198 capacitor modules.

Size Multi-axis Shared-bus Configurations Appendix C
Table 82 - Shared DC Panel Layout

Frame Size Number of Capacitor
Leader Drive Cat. No. Follower Drives, max (1) Follower Cat. No.
Combination Modules, max
2198-H003-ERSx 4 2198-H003-ERSx 0
1 2198-H003-ERSx 1
2198-H008-ERSx 4
2198-H008-ERSx 1
2198-H003-ERSx
2 and 1
2198-H015-ERSx 6 2198-H008-ERSx 1
2 2198-H015-ERSx
2198-H003-ERSx
2 and 1
2198-H008-ERSx
2198-H025-ERSx 6 3
2198-H015-ERSx
2
2198-H025-ERSx
2198-H003-ERSx
2 and 1
2198-H008-ERSx
2198-H040-ERSx 6 2198-H015-ERSx 3
2 2198-H025-ERSx
2198-H040-ERSx
2198-H003-ERSx
3 and 1
2198-H008-ERSx
2198-H015-ERSx
2198-H070-ERSx 7 4
3 and 2 2198-H025-ERSx
2198-H040-ERSx
3 2198-H070-ERSx
(1) For Bulletin 2198 capacitor module maximum values, refer to the Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module Installation Instructions, publication 2198-IN004.
Figure 106 - Typical DC Common Bus Configuration

Bonded Cabinet
Ground
Three-phase
Input Power DC Bus Connections
24V Input
Control Power
2198-H040-ERSx 2198-CAPMOD-1300 Capacitor Module

Common-bus Leader Drive (optional component)
2198-H008-ERSx
Common-bus
Follower Drives
IMPORTANT Total number of drives in Kinetix 5500 drive system must not exceed 8.
For an example shared DC installation with additional details, refer to Typical

Shared DC Common-bus Installations on page 20.

Shared AC/DC Configurations
In a shared AC/DC configuration, the first (leftmost) drive receives AC input

voltage. The shared-bus connection system extends the AC and DC bus to all
downstream drives:
• All drives are configured in the project file as Shared AC/DC drives.
• Drives must be of the same power rating (catalog number).
• Shared AC/DC configurations support Bulletin 2198 capacitor
modules
• Total available converter power is derated by 30%.
• The maximum number of drives configured as Shared AC/DC is
described in Table 83.
Table 83 - Shared AC/DC Panel Layout

Number of Capacitor
Drive Cat. No. Frame Size Drives Configured as Shared AC/DC, max (1) Modules, max
2198-H003-ERSx 0
1 8
2198-H008-ERSx 1
2198-H015-ERSx
2198-H025-ERSx 2 4 4
2198-H040-ERSx
2198-H070-ERSx 3 2 4
(1) For Bulletin 2198 capacitor module maximum values, refer to the Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module Installation Instructions,
publication 2198-IN004.
Figure 107 - Typical Shared AC/DC Configuration

Bonded Cabinet
Ground
Three-phase
24V Input
Control Power

(top view)
For an example shared AC/DC installation with additional details, refer to

Typical Shared AC/DC Installations on page 19.

Shared AC/DC Hybrid Configurations
In shared AC/DC hybrid configurations, three-phase AC input power is

supplied to two or more (leader) drives that act as converters. This parallel
converter configuration increases the DC power supplied to the inverter
(follower) drives:
• The leftmost drives in a hybrid configuration act as parallel converter
drives and must be of the same power rating (catalog number).
• Shared DC (inverter) drives mounted to the right of the shared AC/DC
(converter) drives must have the same or lower power rating (catalog
number) than the shared AC/DC drives.
• The total motoring load must not exceed the rated load for the drives
sourcing the DC power. Each follower drive must be sized for the motor
load connected to it.
• Total available converter power is derated by 30%.
• The maximum number of drives configured in the project file as
Shared AC/DC is restricted according to Table 83 on page 228.
• The maximum number of drives configured in the project file as
Shared DC is restricted according to Table 82 on page 227.
• Shared AC/DC hybrid configurations support Bulletin 2198 capacitor
modules.
Figure 108 - Typical Shared AC/DC Hybrid Configuration

Bonded Cabinet
Ground
Three-phase
24V Input
Control Power
2198-H040-ERSx
2198-CAPMOD-1300 Capacitor Module (1)
Common-bus (converter)
2198-H008-ERSx (optional component)
Leader Drives
Common-bus (inverter)
Follower Drives
(1) For Bulletin 2198 capacitor module maximum values, refer to the Kinetix 5500 Capacitor Module Installation Instructions,
publication 2198-IN004.
For an example shared AC/DC hybrid installation with additional details,

refer to Typical Shared AC/DC Bus Hybrid Installations on page 21.

Power Sharing Sizing For best results, size motors based on load torque requirements by using
Motion Analyzer software. Select drives based on continuous or peak torque
Examples requirements. Based on the load profile, use Motion Analyzer software to
estimate the net converter and inverter power and bus regulator capacity.
Table 84 - Converter and Bus Regulator Capacity

Configuration Available Converter Capacity Available Regenerative Capacity
Shared AC Converter power rating of each drive Internal shunt of each drive
Common bus Converter power rating of leader drive
Sum of all internal shunts from each drive in
Shared AC/DC Sum of converter power ratings times 0.7 bus-sharing group
Shared AC/DC hybrid (70%)
Shared DC Example
In this example four 2198-H040-ERS drives are used in a common-bus

configuration.
Figure 109 - DC Common Bus Configuration

Bonded Cabinet
Ground
Three-phase
24V Input
Control Power
2198-H040-ERS
Common-bus Leader Drive 2198-H040-ERS
Common-bus
Follower Drives
Each 2198-H040-ERS drive is rated at 8.4 kW continuous output power to

bus. However, only the leader drive acts as the converter, so the available
converter power to the system is 8.4 kW. In this example, total motoring load
must not exceed 8.4 kW.

Shared AC/DC Hybrid Example
If the required motoring power exceeds the available converter power sourced
by the shared DC configuration, then connect a second converter drive to
make a shared AC/DC hybrid configuration. This increases the available
converter power.
In this example, the same four 2198-H040-ERS drives are used, however, two
are connected as parallel converter (leader) drives and the other two as
common-bus (follower) drives. The total converter power is derated by 30%.
Figure 110 - Shared AC/DC Hybrid Configuration

Bonded Cabinet
Ground
Three-phase
24V Input
Control Power
2198-H040-ERS 2198-H040-ERS
Common-bus (converter) Common-bus (inverter)
Leader Drives Follower Drives
The available converter power to the system is (8.4 • 2) • 0.7 = 11.76 kW. In
this example, total motoring load must not exceed 11.76 kW. The available
converter power was increased by 40% over the same drives in shared DC
configuration.

Shared AC/DC Example
If the required motoring power exceeds the available converter power sourced
by two leader drives, then connect all four drives as parallel converter drives.
This further increases the available converter power.
In this example, the same four 2198-H040-ERS drives are used, however, all
four are connected as parallel converter (leader) drives. The total converter
power is derated by 30%.
Figure 111 - Shared AC/DC Configuration

Bonded Cabinet
Ground
Three-phase
24V Input
Control Power
2198-H040-ERS
Converter Drives
The available converter power to the system is (8.4 • 4) • 0.7 = 23.52 kW. In
this example, total motoring load must not exceed 23.52 kW. The available
converter power was increased by 180% over the same drives in shared DC
configuration.
Control Power Current Kinetix 5500 servo drives and the Bulletin 2198 capacitor module have
different 24V DC power consumption. Factors to consider when calculating
Calculations the combined current demand from your 24V DC power supply includes the
following:
• Catalog number for each drive in the system
• Whether the motor or actuator includes the holding brake option
• Whether the system includes Bulletin 2198 capacitor modules (1 to 4
modules are possible)

Table 85 - Control Power Current Demand

24V Current 24V Current 24V Inrush Current (1)
Cat. No. (non-brake motor) (2 A brake motor)
A
ADC ADC
2198-H003-ERSx
0.4 2.4 2.0
2198-H008-ERSx
2198-H015-ERSx
2198-H025-ERSx 0.8 2.8
3.0
2198-H040-ERSx
2198-H070-ERSx 1.3 3.3
2198-CAPMOD-1300 0.3 N/A 2.0
(1) Inrush current duration is less than 30 ms.
Kinetix 5500 System Current Demand Example
In this example, the Kinetix 5500 drive system includes two 2198-H040-ERS
drives, four 2198-H008-ERS drives, and one capacitor module.
Figure 112 - Shared AC/DC Hybrid Configuration

Bonded Cabinet
Ground
Three-phase
24V Input
Control Power
3.5 A min, non-brake motors
15.2 A min, brake motors
2198-H040-ERS 2198-CAPMOD-1300
Servo Drives 2198-H008-ERS Capacitor Module
Servo Drives
Table 86 - Kinetix 5500 System Current Demand Calculations

24V Current 24V Current 24V Inrush Current (1)
Kinetix 5500 Module (non-brake motors) (2 A brake motors)
Qty
Cat. No. A
ADC ADC
2198-H008-ERSx 4 0.4 x 4 = 1.6 2.4 x 4 = 9.6 2x4=8
2198-H040-ERSx 2 0.8 x 2 = 1.6 2.8 x 2 = 5.6 3x2=6
2198-CAPMOD-1300 1 0.3 x 1 = 0.3 N/A 2x1=2
Total current demand 3.5 15.2 16
(1) Inrush current duration is less than 30 ms.

Energy Calculations The Kinetix 5500 servo drives have internal shunt resistors for dissipating
excessive energy. In addition, Bulletin 2097 external shunt resistors and
Bulletin 2198 capacitor modules are available to increase the shared DC bus
capacitance.
Use this table to calculate the total energy absorbing potential (joules) and
determine if a capacitor module or external shunt resistor is needed.
Table 87 - Energy Absorbing Potential
Kinetix 5500 Drive Internal Shunt (1) External Shunt Capacitor Module (1) Capacitor Module, max (2)
Cat. No. J kJ J J
2198-H003-ERSx N/A N/A
427.09 12.51
2198-H008-ERSx 554.4 554.4
2198-H015-ERSx 549.01 12.521 676.32 676.32
2198-H025-ERSx 575.223 12.549 702.53 957.162
2198-H040-ERSx 601.434 22.647 728.74 983.373
2198-H070-ERSx 1827.01 27.218 1954.3 2208.95
(1) Value assumes the use of one servo drive and one capacitor module.
(2) Value assumes the use of one servo drive and the maximum number of capacitor modules allowed.
Refer to Motion Analyzer software, version 7.0 or later, for custom shunt
sizing.

Appendix D
Motor Control Feature Support
This appendix provides feature descriptions for the induction motors and
permanent-magnet motors that are supported by Kinetix 5500 servo drives.
Topic Page
Frequency Control Methods 236
Current Limiting for Frequency Control 240
Stability Control for Frequency Control 243
Skip Speeds 245
Flux Up 247
Current Regulator Loop Settings 250
Motor Category 250
Selection of Motor Thermal Models 255
Speed Limited Adjustable Torque (SLAT) 257
Motor Overload Retention 263
Torque Proving 264
Velocity Droop 267
Commutation Test 269
Adaptive Tuning 269

Appendix D Motor Control Feature Support
Frequency Control Methods The Kinetix 5500 servo drives support three open-loop frequency control
methods. These are the choices:
• Basic Volts/Hertz - This method is used in single asynchronous-motor
applications
• Basic Volts/Hertz - Fan Pump - This method is similar to Basic Volts/
Hertz, but is specifically tailored for fan/pump applications
• Sensorless Vector with Slip Compensation - This method is used for
most constant torque applications. Provides excellent starting,
acceleration, and running torque
To configure your induction motor in the Logix Designer application, refer to

Configure Induction-motor Frequency-control Axis Properties on page 127.
Open-loop frequency control is suitable in applications such as conveyors,

pumps, and fans. Features include the following:
• Start Boost and Run Boost
• Electronic motor thermal-overload protection per Class 10
requirements
• Two skip frequencies, in which the drive does not operate
• All three-phase induction motors, suitable for variable speed drive
(VFD) operation, are supported
Table 88 - Motor Specifications

Attribute Value
Output frequency, max 590 Hz
Pole pairs, max 50
Motor cable length, max 50 m (164 ft) (1)
(1) Applies to all Kinetix 5500 (frame 2 and 3) drives. For Kinetix 5500 (frame 1) drives in
continuous-flex applications, 30 m (98 ft) is the maximum cable length.

Motor Control Feature Support Appendix D
Basic Volts/Hertz
Volts/hertz operation creates a fixed relationship between output voltage and

output frequency. Voltage is applied to the motor, which is based on the
operating frequency command at a fixed volts/hertz ratio. The ratio is
calculated from the motor nameplate data and entered into the Logix Designer
application>
Axis Properties>Frequency Control category.
The Basic Volts/Hertz method provides various patterns. The default

configuration is a straight line from zero to rated voltage and frequency. As
seen in Figure 113, you can change the volts/hertz ratio to provide increased
torque performance when required by programming five distinct points on the
curve.
Table 89 - Basic Volts/Hertz Definitions

Curve Feature Definition
Used to create additional torque for breakaway from zero speed and acceleration
Start boost of heavy loads at lower speeds.
Used to create additional running torque at low speeds. The value is typically less
than the required acceleration torque. The drive lowers the boost voltage to this
Run boost level when running at low speeds (not accelerating). This reduces excess motor
heating that could result if the higher start/accel boost level were used.
Used to increase the slope of the lower portion of the Volts/Hertz curve, providing
Break voltage/frequency additional torque.
Motor nameplate voltage/ Sets the upper portion of the curve to match the motor design. Marks the
frequency beginning of the constant power region.
Maximum voltage/frequency Slopes the portion of the curve that is used above base speed.
Figure 113 - Basic Volts/Hertz Method
Voltage, max
Base Voltage
(nameplate)
Break Voltage
Start/Accel Boost
Run Boost
Break Base Frequency, Frequency,

Frequency (nameplate) max

Basic Volts/Hertz for Fan/Pump Applications
The Basic Volts/Hertz Fan/Pump (fan/pump) method is based on the Basic

Volts/Hertz (V/Hz) method, but is specifically tailored for fan/pump
applications.
Figure 114 - Output Voltage Equation
2 Where:
fx Vx = Output voltage
Vx = V n – V boost + Vboost
fn fx = Output frequency
Vn = Rated voltage
Fn = Rated frequency
Vboost = Run boost voltage
For maximum system efficiency, fan/pump loads use variable frequency drives
that are equipped with a specific V/Hz curve where voltage is proportional to
square of the frequency.
Figure 115 - Basic Volts/Hertz Fan/Pump Method
Voltage, max
Base Voltage
(nameplate)
Voltage
Run Boost
Frequency (Hz) Base Frequency, Frequency,

(nameplate) max
TIP The Fan/Pump control method supports the run-boost attribute, but does
not support break-voltage, break-frequency, or start-boost.

Sensorless Vector
The Sensorless Vector method uses a volts/hertz core enhanced by a current

resolver, slip estimator, and a voltage-boost compensator based on the
operating conditions of the motor.
Figure 116 - Sensorless Vector Method

Motor Pole
Velocity Trim Pairs
Velocity Command Voltage

+ x V/Hz + Inverter Motor
Control
Vboost
Estimator
Torque Current
Slip Speed Estimate Load Feedback
Slip Current
Torque
Estimation Resolver
Estimator
The algorithms operate on the knowledge of the relationship between the

rated slip and torque of the motor. The drive uses applied voltages and
measured currents to estimate operating slip-frequency. You can enter values to
identify the motor resistance value or you can run a motor test to identify the
motor resistance value (see Motor Tests and Autotune Procedure on page 252).
Motor nameplate data and test results are ways to accurately estimate the
required boost voltage.
The sensorless vector method offers better torque production and speed
regulation over a wider speed range than basic volts/hertz.
Dynamic boost is applied internally to compensate voltage drop and improve

starting torque.
Figure 117 - Approximate Load Curve
Voltage, max
Base Voltage
(nameplate)
Ideal, volts/hertz
Dynamic Boost Applied
Base Frequency, Frequency,

(nameplate) max

Current Limiting for The current limiting module prevents the OutputCurrent value from
exceeding the OperativeCurrentLimit value when the drive is configured in
Frequency Control Frequency Control mode.
Figure 118 - Current Limiting Module

Fine
Velocity from Planner Velocity
Command +
(MAJ) – Reference
Velocity
Operative + PI
Current Limit –
Output
Current
In Frequency Control mode, OperativeCurrentLimit is the minimum value of

the motor-thermal current limit, inverter-thermal current limit, motor-peak
current limit, drive-peak current limit, and the CurrentVectorLimit value.
The Effects of Current Limiting

Indirect current limiting is available for induction motors configured for
frequency control. You can use this feature to help prevent overcurrent faults
due to aggressive acceleration/deceleration profiles or impact loads. The
Current Limiting attribute uses a PI regulator to control the OutputCurrent
by adjusting the velocity reference.
Figure 119 - Effects of Current Limiting on an Aggressive Acceleration

Aggressive Acceleration, No Current Limiting Aggressive Acceleration, Current Limiting Active
16 70 16 70
Output Current (Arms), Operative Current Limit (rms)
14 60 14 60
12 50 12 50
10 40 10 40
Frequency (Hz)
Frequency (Hz)
8 30 8 30
6 20 6 20
4 10 4 10
2 0 2 0
0 -10 0 -10
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
Time (ms) Time (ms)
Output Current Operative Current Limit Output Frequency Output Current Operative Current Limit Output Frequency

Figure 120 - Effects of Current Limiting on an Impact Load

Impact Load, No Current Limiting Impact Load, Current Limiting Active
12 70 12 70

60 60
10 10
50 50
8 8
Frequency (Hz)
40 40
Frequency (Hz)
6 30 6 30
20 20
4 4
10 10
2 2
0 0
0 -10 0 -10
4000 4200 4400 4600 4800 5000 5200 5400 5600 5800 4000 4200 4400 4600 4800 5000 5200 5400 5600 5800
Time (ms) Time (ms)
Output Current Operative Current Limit Output Frequency Output Current Operative Current Limit Output Frequency
Current limiting for frequency control is not enabled by default. You can
enable via messaging by using the following device-specific attributes.
TIP We recommend you leave the Kp, Ki, Kd gains at the default values.
Table 90 - Enable Current Limiting via Messaging

Attribute Type Conditional
Attribute Name Description
Offset Implementation
When enabled, limits the rate of change to the velocity reference during high-current situations for
improved current limiting. This feature is only active when executing an MDS command and when
Current Limiting configured for Frequency Control.
3022 SINT Enable
0 = Current Limiting is disabled
1 = Current Limiting is enabled
Frequency Control Derivative gain for the current limiting function. Only functional when configured for Frequency
3023 REAL Current Limiting Kd Induction Motor only Control and when executing an MDS command. Units of seconds.
Integral gain for the current limiting function. Only functional when configured for Frequency Control
3024 REAL Current Limiting Ki and when executing an MDS command. Units of feedback counts / (Amp, inst* Seconds).
Proportional gain for the current limiting function. Only functional when configured for Frequency
3025 REAL Current Limiting Kp Control and when executing an MDS command. Units of feedback counts / Amp, inst.
IMPORTANT For induction motors greater than 5 Hp, it is recommended that the Stability
Control feature also be enabled when Current Limiting is enabled.

Enable the CurrentVectorLimit Attribute
In this example, a Message Configuration (MSG) instruction is configured to

enable the CurrentVectorLimit attribute for axis 1. The Instance field is used to
direct the message to the proper axis.
Set the CurrentVectorLimit Attribute Value.
1. Select the Parameter List category and scroll to CurrentVectorLimit.
2. Set the CurrentVectorLimit value appropriate for your application.

Stability Control for Stability control is available for induction motors configured for frequency
control. This feature can be used to help remove resonances that are sometimes
Frequency Control seen on larger motors. The stability control feature adjusts the
OutputFrequency and OutputVoltage commands to stabilize the
OutputCurrent.
Figure 121 - Effects of Stability Control

Id Feedback, Iq Feedback versus Commanded Speed with Stability Control Disabled Id Feedback, Iq Feedback versus Commanded Speed with Stability Control Enabled
60 25
50
20
40
Id Feedback, Iq Feedback A-pk
Id Feedback, Iq Feedback A-pk

15
30
20 10
10 5
0
0
-10
-5
-20
Commanded Frequency, Hz Commanded Frequency, Hz
Iq Feedback Id Feedback Iq Feedback Id Feedback
Stability control for frequency control is not enabled by default. You can enable
via messaging by using the following device-specific attributes.
TIP We recommend you leave the angle, voltage gains, and filter bandwidth at
the default values.
Table 91 - Enable Current Limiting via Messaging

Attribute Type Conditional
Attribute Name Description
Offset Implementation
Enables stability control when configured for frequency control.
Stability Control
3026 SINT 0 = Stability Control is disabled
Enable
1 = Stability Control is enabled
3027 REAL Stability Filter Sets the bandwidth of the low-pass filter applied to the current feedback signal. This bandwidth is
Bandwidth Frequency Control common to both the angle and voltage stability control algorithms. Units of radians/second.
Induction Motor only
Stability Voltage The gain of the voltage stability control function. Only active when configured for frequency control.
3028 REAL Gain Units of Volt (inst,p-n)/Amp (inst).
The gain of the electrical angle stability control function. Only active when configured for frequency
3029 REAL Stability Angle Gain control. Units of radians/Amp (inst).
IMPORTANT Because the stability control feature works by manipulating the

OutputVoltage and OutputFrequency signals, these signals may appear
'noisy' when the feature is enabled.

Enable the Stability Control Feature
In this example, a Message Configuration (MSG) instruction is configured to

enable the StabilityControl attribute for axis 1. The Instance field is used to
direct the message to the proper axis.

Skip Speeds Some machines have a resonant operating frequency (vibration speed) that is
undesirable or could cause equipment damage. To guard against continuous
operation at one or more resonant points, you can configure the skip-speed
attributes in the Logix Designer application>Axis Properties>Parameter List
category.
The value that is programmed into the SkipSpeed1 or SkipSpeed2 attribute

sets the central speed of a skip-speed band within which the drive does not
operate. The width of the band is determined by the SkipSpeedBand attribute.
The range is split, half above and half below the SkipSpeedx attribute. Any
command set-point within this band is adjusted by the skip-speed feature to
fall at either the upper or lower skip-speed band boundary value. The skip-
speed feature contains hysteresis (25% of the SkipSpeedBand value) to prevent
frequent switching of VelocityReference.
Figure 122 - Single Skip Speed Example
Speed Velocity
Setpoint
Velocity
Reference
SkipSpeedBand Upper Boundary
SkipSpeed
SkipSpeedBand Lower Boundary
Time
A SkipSpeedBand value of 0 disables the skip-speed feature.
IMPORTANT When a single SkipSpeed value is desired, the SkipSpeed1 and

SkipSpeed2 settings must be the same.
IMPORTANT Acceleration and deceleration are affected by the skip-speed feature. Too
large of a SkipSpeedBand value can result in an overcurrent drive fault.
IMPORTANT The MaximumFrequency attribute is always enforced. Skip-speed band

boundary values beyond the MaximumFrequency value do not apply.

Multiple Skip Speeds
The Kinetix 5500 drives feature two independent skip-speed attributes

(SkipSpeed1 and SkipSpeed2) that use the same SkipSpeedBand.
Figure 123 - Multiple Skip Speed Example
SkipSpeed2 SkipSpeedBand
Speed
SkipSpeed1 SkipSpeedBand
0
0 Time
When skip-speed band boundaries of SkipSpeed1 and SkipSpeed2 overlap, the

skip-speed hysteresis is calculated using the effective skip band.
In Figure 124, SkipSpeed1 is set to 0 and SkipSpeed2 is set to 15 hz. The skip
band is 10 hz wide.
At point A the axis is enabled, and the motor begins to rotate at -5 Hz even
though the command is 0 Hz. As the command reaches hysteresis point the
output frequency begins to follow the command. During deceleration, when
the command decreases to 0 Hz, the output frequency continues at 5 Hz until
the axis is disabled (point B), or the command is changed outside of the skip
band.
Figure 124 - Zero-speed Skip Frequency

30
25
20
SkipSpeed1 = 0 Hz
15 SkipSpeed2 = 15 Hz
Skip Band = 10 Hz
10
5
A
0
B
-5
-10
0 5000 10,000 15,000 20,000 25,000 30,000 35,000 40,000
Command Frequency Output Frequency

Flux Up AC induction motors require that flux builds in the motor stator before
controlled torque can develope. To build flux, voltage is applied. There are two
methods to flux the motor and three configurable FluxUpControl settings.
With the No Delay setting (normal start), flux is established when the output
voltage and frequency are applied to the motor. While flux is building, the
unpredictable nature of the developed torque can cause the rotor to oscillate
even though acceleration of the load can occur. In the motor, the acceleration
profile does not follow the commanded acceleration profile due to the lack of
developed torque.
Figure 125 - Acceleration Profile during Normal Start - No Flux Up

Frequency
Reference
Rated Flux
Frequency
Stator
Rotor
Oscillation due to flux

being established.
0
Time
With the Automatic setting (default) DC current is applied to the motor so

that flux builds before rotation. The flux-up time period is based on the level of
flux-up current and the rotor time constant of the motor. The flux-up current is
not adjustable.
In the Manual setting, DC current is applied to the motor so that flux builds
before rotation. The flux-up time period is determined by the FluxUpTime
attribute. The flux-up current is not adjustable.
Figure 126 - Flux Up Current versus Flux Up Time

Flux Up Current = Maximum DC Current
Flux Up Current
Rated Flux Rated Motor Flux

Current
Motor Flux
0
T1
T2
T3
T4
Flux Up Time

Once rated flux is reached in the motor, normal operation can begin and the
desired acceleration profile achieved.
Figure 127 - Rated Flux Reached
IR Voltage - SVC
Greater of IR Voltage or
Voltage Boost - V/Hz
Flux Up Stator Voltage
Voltage Rotor Speed
Motor Flux
Stator Frequency
Flux Up Normal Operation

Time
Flux Up Attributes
ID Access Attribute Conditional Implementation
558 Set Flux Up Control Ind Motor only
0 = No Delay
1 = Manual Delay
2 = Automatic Delay
559 Set Flux Up Time (1) Ind Motor only
Units: Seconds
Default: 0.0000
Min/Max: 0.0000 / 1000.00
(1) This is the time designated for the Manual Delay setting. This attribute is not supported by the Automatic delay method. The
flux-up feature is disabled if FluxUpControl is set to Manual Delay and FluxUpTime is set to 0.
FluxUpControl Attribute
When the motion axis is enabled, DC current is applied to an induction motor

to build stator flux before transitioning to the Running state. This attribute
controls how an induction motor is to be fluxed in the Starting state prior to
transitioning to the Running state.
Table 92 - FluxUp Control Delay Methods

Delay Method Description
No delay The axis transitions immediately to the Running state while the motor flux is building.
The axis remains in the Starting state while the motor stator flux is building according to the
Manual delay Flux Up Time attribute.
The drive determines the amount of delay time to fully flux the motor based on the motor
Automatic delay configuration attribute data or measurements.
FluxUpTime Attribute
When FluxUpControl is configured for Manual Delay, this attribute sets the
length of delay time to fully flux the motor before transitioning to the Running
state.

Configure the Flux Up Attributes
Follow these steps to configure the flux-up attributes.

2. Select the Parameter List category and scroll to FluxUpControl.
3. From the FluxUpControl pull-down menu, choose the proper delay

value appropriate for your application.
4. If you chose Manual Delay in step 3, enter a value in the FluxUpTime

attribute appropriate for your application.
If you chose No Delay or Automatic Delay in step 3, the FluxUpTime
attribute does not apply.

Current Regulator Loop Current loop bandwidth is set differently based on the selected motor type.
Settings Table 93 - Current Regulator Loop Settings
Default Torque/Current Loop Bandwidth
Motor Type
Hz
Rotary permanent magnet 1000
Rotary induction 400
Linear permanent magnet 1000
IMPORTANT The Logix Designer application does not perform calculations when the
Torque/Current Loop Bandwidth attribute is updated. This bandwidth
affects many other gains and limits. Changing, (lowering) the torque
loop bandwidth without updating all the dependent attributes can
result in drive/motor instability.
Motor Category From the Motor category you can enter motor nameplate or datasheet values
(phase-to-phase parameters) for permanent magnet motors.
In this example, the Motor category>Nameplate / Datasheet parameters, were

taken from a typical motor performance datasheet. Max Speed and Peak
Current values are typically application dependent.
Figure 128 - Motor Nameplate / Datasheet Example
See Figure 129 for motor manufacturer performance data sheet example.

Figure 129 - Motor Manufacturer Performance Data Sheet

C E R T I FI C A T I ON DA T A SHE E T
T Y PI C A L M OT OR PE R FOR M A NC E DA T A
HP kW SY NC . R P M F .L . R P M F R AME E NC L O SUR E K V A C O DE DE SI G N
1 .75 1800 1725 56C T E NV P A
PH Hz VOLTS F L AMPS ST A R T T Y P E DUT Y I NSL S.F . A M B°C EL EV ATION

3 60 230/
460 3/ 1.5 INV E R T E R ONL Y C ONT INUOUS F3 1.0 40 3300
F UL L L O AD E F F : 84 3/4 L O AD E F F : 82.5 1/2 L O AD E F F : 78.5 G T D. E F F E L E C . T Y PE NO L O A D A M P S

F UL L L O AD PF : 75 3/4 L O AD PF : 65.5 1/2 L O AD PF : 51 81.5 S Q C AGE INV DUT Y 2/ 1
F .L . T O R Q UE L OC K E D R OT OR AMPS L .R . T O R Q UE B.D. T O R Q UE F .L . R I SE °C
3 L B -F T 30 / 15 10.8 L B -F T 360% 15 L B -F T 500% 65
SO UND P R E SSUR E ST A R T S / APPR OX .

SO UND P O W E R R O T O R W K ^2 M A X . W K ^2 SA F E ST A L L T I M E
@ 3 FT. H O UR MOT OR W G T
62 dB A 72 dB A 0.11 L B -F T ^2 0 L B -F T ^2 0 SE C. 0 42 L B S .
E QU I V A L E NT W Y E C K T .PA R A M E T E R S (OHM S PE R PHA SE )

R1 R2 X1 X2 XM
8.378 5.6232 10.7068 9.9116 278.036
RM ZR E F XR TD T D0
11132.8 284 1.7 0.0071 0.136
Motor>Model Category
From the Motor>Model category you can enter additional motor nameplate or
datasheet values (phase-to-neutral parameters) for induction motors.
The Motor>Model parameters are used in closed-loop induction-motor

control mode, sensorless vector control mode, and when FluxUp is enabled.
You can enter these parameter values directly from the motor nameplate/
datasheet or indirectly by running a Motor>Analyzer test.
Figure 130 - Phase-to-Neutral Parameters
IMPORTANT If you do not know the Stator Leakage, Rotor Leakage, Stator Resistance,
Rated Flux Current, and system inertia, you can run the static motor test and
Autotune procedure to determine the parameter values.

Motor>Analyzer Category
From the Motor>Analyzer category you can perform three types of tests to
identify motor parameters.
In this example, the Calculate Model test was run. If the Motor>Analyzer test
executes successfully and you accept the test values, they populate the Model
Parameter attributes.
Figure 131 - Motor Analyzer Category
Motor Tests and Autotune Procedure

You can perform three types of tests to identify motor parameters and one test
for motor/system inertia. These parameters are used by sensorless-vector
frequency-control and induction motor closed-loop modes. Table 94
recommends which test to use based on the control mode and application.
Table 94 - Motor Tests and Autotune Matrix

Control Mode Description Calculate Static Dynamic Autotune (inertia test)
Basic volts/hertz Not required Not required Not required Not required
Basic volts/hertz
Induction motor - Frequency control Not required Not required Not required Not required
for Fan/Pump
Sensorless vector Required Preferred Not required Not required
Induction motor - Closed-loop control Required Preferred (1) Preferred Required (2)
(1) If it is not desired to rotate the motor (due to coupled load) you can perform this test for induction motor closed-loop mode and skip the Dynamic test. The dynamic test
provides the best results for induction motor closed-loop mode.
(2) Autotune must be performed to identify the inertia motor value before running a dynamic test.
For motor/system autotune procedure, see Tune Induction Motors on


The Motor>Analyzer category offers three choices for calculating or

measuring electrical motor data.
Follow these steps to run motor tests and identify motor parameters.

2. Select the Motor>Analyzer category and select the motor test
appropriate for your application.
3. Click Start to run the test.

4. Click Accept Test Results to save the values.
5. Click OK.
Motor Analyzer Category Troubleshooting
Calculate Model
When a Calculate test is run, the drive uses motor nameplate data to estimate
the motor’s Rated Flux Current, Stator Resistance (Rs), Stator Leakage
Reactance (X1) and Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2). No measurements are
taken when using the Calculate test.
Static Motor Test

• Use the Static test if the motor shaft cannot rotate or if it is already
coupled to the load. Only tests that do not create motor movement are
run. During this test, the Stator Resistance (Rs), Stator Leakage
Reactance (X1), and Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) values are measured
during a series of static tests. The Rated Flux Current is estimated, since
measurement of this value requires motor movement.

• The Static test requires that you enter initial estimates for Rated Flux
Current, Stator Resistance (Rs), Stator Leakage Reactance (X1), and
Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) into the Motor Model fields. This can be
done by running and accepting the results of a Calculate test, or by
entering the values directly into the Logix Designer application.
Dynamic Motor Test

• Dynamic tests are run with the motor disconnected from the load,
because the motor shaft turns and there are no travel limits. This is often
the most accurate test method. During this test, the Stator Resistance
(Rs), Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) and Rotor Leakage Reactance
(X2) values are measured in a series of static tests. The Rated Flux
Current is measured during a rotational test, in which the drive
commands 75% of the motor rated speed.
IMPORTANT The Dynamic test does not support travel limits.
• The Dynamic test also requires that you enter initial estimates for Rated
Flux Current, Stator Resistance (Rs), Stator Leakage Reactance (X1),
and Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) into the Motor Model fields. This
can be done by running and accepting the results of a Calculate test, or
by entering the values directly into the Logix Designer application.
• The Dynamic test uses the Ramp Acceleration and Ramp Deceleration
attributes to set the rotational test ramp-up and ramp-down times. If the
resulting acceleration/deceleration times are less than 10 seconds, 10
seconds is used. If these attributes are not supported, 10 seconds is also
used.
• When configured for closed-loop control, the Dynamic test requires
that the system inertia is set in the Logix Designer application. This can
be done by running and accepting the results of an Autotune test, or by
entering the motor inertia value directly into the Logix Designer
application.
• When configured for closed-loop control, the Dynamic test uses the
velocity regulator tuning as entered into the Logix Designer application.
If the motor is coupled to a load, the velocity regulator tuning may need
to be adjusted to make sure the velocity response is well controlled. The
Dynamic test fails if the steady-state velocity feedback is not within a
±30% tolerance of the commanded velocity.
IMPORTANT The Dynamic test is not supported in closed-loop Torque Control.
• If using the Dynamic test in Frequency Control mode, uncouple the

motor from any load or results may not be valid. In closed-loop control,
either a coupled or uncoupled load produces valid results.

Selection of Motor Thermal The Kinetix 5500 drives contain two motor thermal-overload protection
algorithms that you can use to prevent the motor from overheating.
Models
Generic Motors
The default thermal model is a generic I2T Class 10 overload protection

algorithm. This model is active if the MotorWindingToAmbientResistance or
the MotorWindingToAmbientCapacitance values are 0.0. The purpose of this
algorithm is to limit the time a motor is operating with excessive levels of
current. The relationship between Motor Overload Factory Limit trip-time
and motor output current is shown in Figure 132.
Figure 132 - Motor Overload Curve
100,000
10,000
1000
100
10
0 100 125 150 175 200 225 250
You can use the MotorOverloadLimit attribute (default of 100%, max of

200%) to increase the motor overload trip-time by artificially increasing the
motor rated current (for thermal protection only). MotorOverloadLimit
should only be increased above 100% if cooling options are applied. Increasing
MotorOverloadLimit causes MotorCapacity to increase more slowly.
The generic motor thermal model also derates the motor rated current (for
thermal protection only) when operating at low speeds. The derating factor is
30% at 0 Hz and 0% at 20 Hz, with linear interpolation between. Operating at
output frequencies less than 20 Hz causes MotorCapacity to increase more
quickly.
When the generic motor thermal-model is active, the MotorCapacity attribute

increases only if the motor output current is greater than the effective motor
rated current (taking into account the MotorOverloadLimit and low speed
derating factor). The default MotorThermalOverloadFactoryLimit and
MotorThermalOverloadUserLimit values for this thermal model are both
100%.
IMPORTANT The generic motor-thermal model does not support Current Foldback as
a Motor Overload Action.

Thermally Characterized Motors
If the MotorWindingToAmbientResistance and

MotorWindingToAmbientCapacitance attribute values are both non-zero, the
motor is considered thermally characterized and an alternate motor thermal
model is run. The purpose of this algorithm is to limit the time a motor is
operating with excessive levels of current. This thermal model uses the first-
order time constant determined from the
MotorWindingToAmbientResistance and
MotorWindingToAmbientCapacitance values to estimate the motor thermal
capacity based on the motor output current.
The MotorOverloadLimit attribute (default of 100%, max of 200%) can be

used to increase the motor overload trip-time by increasing the
MotorThermalOverloadFactoryLimit value. The MotorOverloadLimit
should be increased above 100% only if cooling options are applied. Increasing
MotorOverloadLimit does not change the behavior of MotorCapacity.
This thermal model supports setting the MotorOverloadAction attribute as

Current Foldback. Selecting the Current Foldback action results in a reduction
in the current reference via the MotorThermalCurrentLimit attribute value
that is reduced in proportion the percentage difference between the
MotorCapacity and the MotorOverloadLimit values.
When this thermal model is active, the MotorCapacity attribute is non-zero if

the motor output current is non-zero. The default
MotorThermalOverloadFactoryLimit and MotorThermalOverloadUserLimit
values for this thermal model are both 110%.
IMPORTANT This thermal model does not derate the motor-rated current when
operating at low speeds. Operating at low output frequencies does not
cause the MotorCapacity behavior to change.

Speed Limited Adjustable Speed limited adjustable torque (SLAT) is a special mode of operation used
primarily in web handling applications. While configured for SLAT, the drive
Torque (SLAT) typically operates as a torque regulator. The drive can automatically enter
velocity regulation based on conditions within the velocity regulator and the
magnitude of the velocity regulator's output, relative to the applied
TorqueTrim attribute.
A torque regulated application can be described as any process requiring

tension control. For example, a winder or unwinder with material being drawn
or pulled with a specific tension required. The process also requires that
another element set the speed.
When operating as a torque regulator, the motor current is adjusted to achieve

the desired torque. If the material being wound or unwound breaks, the load
decreases dramatically and the motor can potentially go into a runaway
condition.
The SLAT feature is used to support applications that require a robust

transition from torque regulation to velocity regulation (and vice versa). The
SLAT feature can be configured via the SLATConfiguration attribute as:
Table 95 - SLAT Configuration Descriptions

Name Description
SLAT Disable SLAT function is disabled. Normal Velocity Loop operation.
Drive automatically switches from Torque regulation to Velocity regulation if
SLAT Min Speed/Torque VelocityError < 0 and switch back to Torque regulation if VelocityError > SLATSetPoint for
SLATTimeDelay.
SLAT Max Speed/Torque Drive automatically switches from Torque regulation to Velocity regulation if
VelocityError > 0 and switches back to Torque regulation if VelocityError < SLATSetPoint
for SLATTimeDelay.
Direction of the applied torque and direction of the material movement

determine whether SLAT minimum or SLAT maximum mode should be used.

SLAT Min Speed/Torque
SLAT Min Speed/Torque is a special mode of operation primarily used in web

handling applications. The drive typically operates as a torque regulator,
provided that the TorqueTrim attribute is less than the torque output due to
the velocity regulator's control effort. The drive can automatically enter
magnitude of the velocity regulator's output relative to the torque reference.
When used for SLAT control, an application dependent VelocityCommand

value is applied to the drive via an MAJ instruction. An application dependent
TorqueTrim value is also applied via cyclic write. Under normal operation,
VelocityCommand is set to a level that results in the velocity regulator's control
effort becoming saturated when the motor's speed is mechanically limited. The
TorqueReference value equals the TorqueTrim value, resulting in a positive
VelocityError value.
Should the mechanical speed limitation be removed (example: web break), the
motor accelerates and VelocityError becomes negative. At this time, a forced
transition to velocity regulation occurs, and the motor's speed is regulated to
the VelocityCommand attribute.
The axis remains in velocity regulation until VelocityError exceeds

SLATSetPoint for a time specified by SLATTimeDelay. At this point, the axis
returns to operating as a torque regulator.
Figure 133 - SLAT Min Speed/Torque
Velocity Error < 0

Select Minimum of Velocity Loop Output Select Velocity Loop Output
or Torque Command or Torque Command
(speed control is OFF) Velocity Error > SLAT Setpoint for SLAT Time (speed control is ON)
See the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Reference Manual,

publication MOTION-RM003, for more information on SLAT attributes.

SLAT Max Speed/Torque
SLAT Max Speed/Torque is a special mode of operation primarily used in web

handling applications. The drive typically operates as a torque regulator,
provided that the TorqueTrim attribute is greater than the torque output due to
the velocity regulator's control effort. The drive can automatically enter
magnitude of the velocity regulator's output relative to the torque reference.
When used for SLAT control, an application dependent VelocityCommand

value is applied to the drive via an MAJ instruction. An application dependent
TorqueTrim value is also applied via cyclic write. Under normal operation,
VelocityCommand is set to a level that results in the velocity regulator's control
effort becoming saturated when the motor's speed is mechanically limited. The
TorqueReference value equals the TorqueTrim value, resulting in a positive
VelocityError value.
Should the mechanical speed limitation be removed (example: web break), the
motor accelerates and VelocityError becomes negative. At this time, a forced
transition to velocity regulation occurs, and the motor's speed is regulated to
the VelocityCommand attribute.
The axis remains in velocity regulation until VelocityError is less than

SLATSetPoint for a time specified by SLATTimeDelay. At this point, the axis
returns to operating as a torque regulator.
Figure 134 - SLAT Max Speed/Torque

Velocity Error > 0
Select Maximum of Velocity Loop Output Select Velocity Loop Output
or Torque Command or Torque Command
(speed control is OFF) Velocity Error < SLAT Setpoint for SLAT Time (speed control is ON)
See the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network Reference Manual,

publication MOTION-RM003, for more information on SLAT attributes.
SLAT Attributes
833 Set SLAT Configuration Ind Motor only
0 = SLAT Disable (1)
1 = SLAT Min Speed/Torque
2 = SLAT Max Speed/Torque
834 Set SLAT Set Point Ind Motor only
Velocity Units
835 Set SLAT Time Delay Ind Motor only
Seconds
(1) SLAT Disable, when viewed in version 28.00 (and earlier) of the Logix Designer application, reads Torque Only. This is expected to
change to SLAT Disable in a future version.

Configure the Axis for SLAT
Follow these steps to configure the SLAT attributes.

3. From the Axis Configuration pull-down menu, choose Velocity Loop.

The Velocity Loop dialog box appears.
4. Enter values for the Velocity Loop attributes appropriate for your
application.

5. Click Apply.
6. Select the Parameters List category.
7. From the SLATConfiguration pull-down menu, choose the SLAT

configuration appropriate for your application.
IMPORTANT SLAT Disable, when viewed in the Logix Designer application,

version 28.00 (and earlier) reads Torque Only. This is expected to
change to SLAT Disable in a future version.
8. Click Apply.
9. Enter values for SLATSetPoint and SLATTimeDelay attributes
appropriate for your application.
10. Click OK.

11. Select the Drive Parameters category.

The Drive Parameters to Controller Mapping dialog box appears.
When using SLAT with the Kinetix 5500, the velocity command is sent to the
drive via an MAJ instruction. The torque command is sent via the cyclic write
TorqueTrim attribute. See the Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network
Reference Manual, publication MOTION-RM003, for more information on
cyclic read and cyclic write.
• When using SLAT, start the axis with the MSO instruction.
• The VelocityCommand is sent via the MAJ instruction.
• The TorqueCommand is sent to AxisTag.TorqueTrim.
• To make changes to the VelocityCommand, you must re-trigger the
MAJ with the Speed value or use a MCD (motion change dynamics)
instruction.
• To stop the axis use a MAS instruction.
• The axis accelerates and decelerates at the MAJ instruction programmed
Acceleration and Deceleration rates.
• You can also change the rates using the MCD instruction.

Motor Overload Retention The motor overload retention feature protects the motor in the event of a drive
power-cycle, in which the motor thermal state is lost.
With motor overload retention, upon drive power-up the MotorCapacity

attribute initially reads:
• 20% if the motor is configured to use an integral thermal switch or an
integral motor winding temperature is available
• 50% if the motor is not configured to use an integral thermal switch or
an integral motor winding temperature is not available
If you have a separate monitoring algorithm within your Logix5000 controller,

you can use the MotorCapacity attribute (635)10 or (27B)16 to change the
initial MotorCapacity value that the motor overload retention feature
populates. You can write to the MotorCapacity attribute only in the Stopped
state after the initial power-up. You cannot write to the MotorCapacity
attribute after the axis is enabled. Use a message instruction to write to the
value.
In this example, the source element tag motorcapacity is a REAL Data type.

Torque Proving The torque proving feature is designed to determine if motor power wiring is
electrically connected to a motor and that reasonable current control exists.
This attribute enables the operation of the drive's torque proving functions that
work in conjunction with mechanical brake control.
When the ProvingConfiguration attribute is enabled, the drive performs a

torque prove test of the motor current while in the Starting state to prove that
current is properly flowing through each of the motor phases before releasing
the brake. If the torque prove test fails, the motor brake stays engaged and a
FLT-S09 Motor Phase Loss exception (fault) is generated.
IMPORTANT The mechanical brake must be set as soon as the drive is disabled. When
the brake is under the control of the axis state machine, this is automatic.
But, when controlled externally, failure to set the brake when the drive is
disabled can cause a free-fall condition on a vertical application.
Table 96 - Torque Proving Startup Sequence

Startup Phase Description
When the drive receives an enable request, the Starting state begins execution and torque
Phase 1 proving starts.
The torque proving feature ramps current to the motor-phase output connector and verifies
Phase 2 that the current feedback circuitry detects current on each of the phases.
Once motor-current feedback has been verified in each motor phase, the drive attempts to
Phase 3 enable the current control loop at a user-specified current level, and verifies that the current-
loop error tolerance is within range.
Torque proving is available for all motoring configurations including closed-

loop servo control and induction motors.
For permanent magnet (PM) motors, the drive attempts to apply current to the
motor phases such that all current through the motor is flux current. However,
due to the electrical angle of the motor at the time of the MSO instruction, it
may not be possible to verify the motor phase wiring with only flux current.
Therefore, with a PM motor it is possible that the motor shaft can move
slightly during torque proving if no motor brake exists to hold the load.
Torque Proving Attributes

590 SSV Proving Configuration 0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
591 SSV Torque Prove Current % Motor Rated
Units: Amps
Default: 0.000
Min/Max: 0/10,000

Torque Proving Configuration
Follow these steps to configure the torque proving attributes.

2. Select the Parameter List category and scroll to ProvingConfiguration.
3. From the ProvingConfiguration pull-down menu, choose Enabled to

enable the torque proving feature.
4. Enter a value in the TorqueProveCurrent attribute appropriate for your

application.
5. Click OK.
The TorqueProveCurrent attribute is active only if ProvingConfiguration is set

to Enabled. TorqueProveCurrent lets you specify the amount of current that is
used during the torque proving test and calculated as a percentage of motor
rating. The higher the TorqueProveCurrent value the more current the drive
delivers to the motor to verify that the motor phase wiring is available and
capable of that current level. High current levels conversely causes more
thermal stress and (potentially) can cause more torque to be driven against the
motor brake during the test. If the TorqueProveCurrent level selected is too
small, the drive cannot distinguish the proving current from noise, and in this
case the drive posts an INHIBIT M04 torque-proving configuration fault
code. The minimum amount of torque proving current depends on catalog
number of the drive.

Torque Proving Current Example
In this example, a 2198-H025-ERSx servo drive is paired with a

VPL-B1003T-C motor with 6.77 A rms rated current. Use the torque-proving
equation and table to calculate the initial minimum torque-proving current as a
percentage of motor rated current. Depending on the unique characteristics of
your application, the required torque-proving current value can be larger than
the initial recommended value.
Figure 135 - Torque Proving Equation
Rating From Table 0.5746 A

x 100% = x 100% = 8.49%
Motor Rated Current 6.77 A
Table 97 - Recommended Torque Proving Current

Torque Proving Current, min
Drive Cat. No.
A, rms
2198-H003-ERSx 0.2514
2198-H008-ERSx 0.6285
2198-H015-ERSx 1.257
2198-H025-ERSx 2.011
2198-H040-ERSx 3.268
2198-H070-ERSx 5.782

Velocity Droop The velocity droop function can be useful when some level of compliance is
required due to rigid mechanical coupling between two motors. The feature is
supported when the axis is configured for Frequency Control, Velocity
Control, or Position Control.
Closed Loop Control

The closed-loop velocity droop function is supported when configured for
either Velocity or Position control. The velocity error input to the integral term
is reduced by a fraction of the velocity regulator's output, as controlled by the
VelocityDroop attribute. Therefore, as torque loading on the motor increases,
actual motor speed is reduced in proportion to the droop gain. This is helpful
when some level of compliance is required due to rigid mechanical coupling
between two motors.
IMPORTANT The closed-loop velocity droop function acts to reduce the velocity error
input to the integral term, but never changes the polarity of the velocity
error.
IMPORTANT When configured for closed-loop control, the units of the VelocityDroop
attribute are Velocity Control Units / Sec / % Rated Torque.
Frequency Control
The velocity droop function is also supported when configured for Frequency
Control. As the estimated Iq current within the motor increases, the velocity
reference is reduced in proportion to the VelocityDroop attribute. Therefore,
as torque loading on the motor increases, actual motor speed is reduced in
proportion to the droop gain. This is helpful when some level of compliance is
required due to rigid mechanical coupling between two motors.
IMPORTANT The frequency-control velocity droop function acts to reduce the velocity
reference, but never changes the direction of the velocity reference.
IMPORTANT When configured for frequency control, the units of the VelocityDroop
attribute are Velocity Control Units / Sec / % Rated Iq Current.
Velocity Droop Attribute

464/321 SSV Velocity Droop Velocity Units / Sec / % Rated

Velocity Droop Configuration
Follow these steps to configure the velocity droop attribute.

2. Select the Parameter List category and scroll to VelocityDroop.
3. Enter a value in the Velocity Droop attribute appropriate for your

application.
4. Click OK.

Commutation Test The commutation test determines an unknown commutation offset and can
also be used to determine the unknown polarity of the start-up commutation
wiring. You can also use the commutation test to verify a known commutation
offset and the polarity start-up commutation wiring.
IMPORTANT For Kinetix 5500 drives, this test applies to only third-party motors.
IMPORTANT When motors have an unknown commutation offset and are not listed in
the Motion Database by catalog number, you cannot enable the axis.
Figure 136 - Hookup Tests - Commutation Tab
To run the commutation test, see Test the Axes on page 145.
Adaptive Tuning The adaptive tuning feature is an algorithm inside the Kinetix 5500drives. The
algorithm continuously monitors and, if necessary, adjusts or adapts various
filter parameters and control-loop gains to compensate for unknown and
changing load conditions while the drive is running. Its primary function is to:
• Automatically adjust torque-loop notch and low-pass filter parameters
to suppress resonances
• Automatically adjust control-loop gains to avoid instability when
detected
See Motion System Tuning Application Techniques, publication MOTION-

AT005, for more information on the AdaptiveTuningConfiguration attribute.

Notes:

Appendix E
EC Certifications
This appendix provides Kinetix 5500 servo system certification information.
Topic Page
EC Type - Examination Certificate 271
EU Declaration of Conformity 272
European Union Directives 277
EC Type - Examination For product certifications currently available from Rockwell Automation, go to
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification.
Certificate

Appendix E EC Certifications
EU Declaration of Conformity For all declarations of conformity (DoC) currently available from
Rockwell Automation, go to http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/
certification/ce.page.

EC Certifications Appendix E




European Union Directives If this product is installed within the European Union or EEC regions and has
the CE mark, the following regulations apply.
CE Conformity
Conformity with the Low Voltage Directive and Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive is demonstrated by using harmonized
European Norm (EN) standards published in the Official Journal of the
European Communities. The safe torque-off circuit complies with the EN
standards when installed according instructions found in this manual.
EMC Directive
This unit is tested to meet Council Directive 2004/108/EC Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) by using these standards, in whole or in part:
• EN 61800-3 - Adjustable Speed Electrical Power Drive Systems,
Part 3 - EMC Product Standard including specific test methods
• EN 61326-3-1 EMC - Immunity requirements for safety-related systems
The product described in this manual is intended for use in an industrial
environment.
CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/certification/
overview.page and in EU Declaration of Conformity on page 272.
Low Voltage Directive

These units are tested to meet Council Directive 2006/95/EC Low Voltage
Directive. The EN 60204-1 Safety of Machinery-Electrical Equipment of
Machines, Part 1-Specification for General Requirements standard applies in
whole or in part. Additionally, the standard EN 61800-5-1 Electronic
Equipment for use in Power Installations apply in whole or in part.
Refer to the Kinetix Servo Drives Specifications Technical Data, publication

GMC-TD003, for environmental and mechanical specifications.

Notes:

Index
Numerics C
2090-CSBM1DF 16, 86 cables
2090-CSBM1DG 16, 86 catalog numbers 86, 92, 96
2198-CAPMOD-1300 29 categories 42
2198-H2DCK 15, 22, 68, 90, 99 Ethernet cable length 102
induction motors 92
2198-KITCON-DSL 15, 22, 88 routing 32
24V input power connector shield clamp 89, 94, 98
pinouts 61 capacitor module 213
wiring 82 catalog number 29
description 15
interconnect diagram 203
A status indicator 160
about this publication 13 support 51
absolute position feature 68 wiring 100
catalog numbers
AC line filters
capacitor module 29
noise reduction 43 motor cables 86, 92, 96
actions category 138 servo drives
adaptive tuning 269 hardwired 29
additional resources 13 integrated 29
Add-on Profile 91, 109 shared-bus connection system 29
alarm 162 category 3
application requirements 180 requirements 172, 180
stop category definitions 172, 181
applying power 140 CE
associated axes tab 121 compliance 30
audience for this manual 13 comply with CE 277
axis properties 126, 127, 136 conformity 277
axis unstable 160 meet requirements 277
certification
application requirements 180
B EC Type - Examination Certificate 271
EU Declaration of Conformity 272
basic volts/hertz 129, 237 European union directives 277
BC connector PL and SIL 172, 181
pinouts 63 TÜV Rheinland 171, 179
wiring 87, 92 user responsibilities 172, 180
Beldon 92 circuit breaker selection 33
block diagrams clamp 89, 94, 98
capacitor module 213 commutation offset 146, 269
power 212 CompactLogix
bonding Ethernet connections 102
EMI (electromagnetic interference) 38 compatibility
examples 39 motor feedback 136
high frequency energy 40
subpanels 40
brake relay 66
Bulletin
MPAI electric cylinders 22
MPAR electric cylinders 22
MPAS linear stages 22
bus
configuration 124
regulator 124
bus-sharing
group 124
group example 142
groups 141

Index
configuring ControlFLASH
basic volts/hertz 129 firmware upgrade 215
controller 110 troubleshooting 222
EtherNet/IP module 112 controller
fan/pump volts/hertz 134 and drive behavior 162
feedback-only axis 122, 126 CompactLogix 110
flux up 249 configure 110
frequency control category 129, 131, 134 ControlLogix 110
general category 126, 127 properties
hardwired 115 date/time tab 114
home screen 104 enable time synchronization 114
hookup test 145 ControlLogix
induction motor tuning 149 Ethernet connections 102
induction-motor frequency-control axis 127 conventions used in this manual 13
integrated safety 117
IP address 108 converter kit
Logix5000 communication 217 2198-H2DCK 90
master feedback 126 cable lengths, max 93
menu screens 105 cable preparation
module properties 116, 117, 119, 121, 123 motor feedback 97
inhibit module 218 motor power/brake 93
motion group 125 description 15
motor Kinetix 5500 AOP 91
test 145 CP connector
motor category 128, 250 pinouts 61
motor feedback 136 wiring 82
motor>analyzer category 133 current limiting 240
network parameters 108 current regulator loop 250
parameter list category 130, 132, 135
PM motor closed-loop axis properties 136
power tab D
bus-sharing group example 142
bus-sharing groups 141 date/time tab 114
sensorless vector 131 DC bus connector
servo motor axis pinouts 61
actions category 138 delay times 139
delay times 139 digital inputs 64
general category 136
load category 138 pinouts 62
motor category 137 wiring 85
parameter list category 139 display 104
scaling category 138 download program 139
setup screens 106 drilling hole patterns 51
SLAT 260 drive replacement
startup sequence 107 integrated safety 185
torque proving 265
velocity droop 268
connecting E
CompactLogix 102
ControlLogix 102 earth ground 78
converter kit shield clamp 98 EC Type - Examination Certificate 271
Ethernet cables 102 EMC
motor shield clamp 89, 94 directive 277
connector kit motor ground termination 89
2198-H2DCK 90 EMI (electromagnetic interference)
2198-KITCON-DSL 88 bonding 38
connector locations EN 61508 172, 181
servo drives 60 EN 62061 172, 181
control power enable time synchronization 114
input specifications 67 enclosure
pinouts 61
system calculations 232 power dissipation 37
wiring 82 requirements 32
sizing 36

Index
encoder support I
DSL 68 I/O
energy calculations 234
digital inputs specifications 64
erratic operation 161 ignore 162
Ethernet connector
induction motor control 92
pinouts 63 configure flux up 249
EtherNet/IP
control methods
connecting cables 102 basic volts/hertz 237
connections 66 fan/pump 238
module properties 112 sensorless vector 239
PORT1 and PORT2 connectors 102 flux up 247
EU Declaration of Conformity 272 flux up attributes 248
European union directives 277 frequency-control axis 127
external shunt resistor 44, 45 motor and inertia tests 252
pinouts 61 motor data sheet 251
wiring 101 motor>analyzer category 252
motor>model category 251
multiple skip speed 246
F open-loop frequency control 236, 240, 243
skip speed 245
fan/pump 238 SLAT 259
fan/pump volts/hertz 134 inhibit module 218
fault input power wiring
code summary 153 24V control 82
codes 152 3-phase delta 74
status only 162 determine input power 73
feedback grounded power configuration 73
configurations 22 grounding screws 76
feedback-only axis 122 mains 83
grounding technique 207 remove grounding screws 77
feedback-only axis 126 ungrounded power configuration 75
firmware upgrade 215 installing drive accessories
system requirements 216 AC line filters 43
verify upgrade 223 external shunt resistor 44, 45
flux up 247 installing your drive 31
attributes 248 bonding examples 39
frequency control category 129, 131, 134 bonding subpanels 40
cable categories 42
fuse selection 33 circuit breakers 33
clearance requirements 37
fuse selection 33
G HF bonding 38
general system mounting requirements 32
category 126, 127, 136 transformer 33
tab 116, 117 integrated safety
grounded power configuration 73 configure always 191
grounding configure only when no safety signature
exists 187
multiple subpanels 79
connections 117
screws 76
drive replacement 185
out-of-box state 184
H protocol 193
STO state reset 181
hardwired connections 115 integrated STO 27, 28
hardwired STO 26 interconnect diagrams
HF bonding 38 2198 drive with LDAT 209
high frequency energy 40 2198 drive with MPAR/MPAI 211
Hiperface-to-DSL feedback converter kit 90 2198 drive with MPAS 210
2198 drive with MPL/MPM/MPF/MPS 208
hole patterns 51
2198 drive with VPL/VPF/VPS 207
home screen bus-sharing drives
soft menu 104 shared AC 204
hookup test 145, 269 shared AC/DC 204

Index
shared AC/DC hybrid 205 module properties

shared DC 205 associated axes tab 121
capacitor module 203 EtherNet/IP module 112
feedback grounding technique 207 general tab 116, 117
notes 201 module definition 113, 116, 118
shunt resistor 206 new tag 121
single-axis drive power tab 123
single-phase 203 safety tab 119
three-phase 202 module status indicator 159
IOD connector motion direct commands
pinouts 62 STO bypas 193
wiring 85 warning messages 194
IP address 108 motion group 125
IPD connector motor
pinouts 61 analyzer category 133, 252
wiring 83 category 128
ISO 13849-1 CAT 3 data sheet 251
requirements 172, 180 feedback compatibility 136
stop category definitions 172, 181 model category 251
motor and inertia tests 252
overload retention 263
K thermal models 255
Kinetix 5500 15 motors
accel/decel problems 160
brake connector
L pinouts 63
wiring 87, 92
Lapp 92 cable catalog numbers 86, 92, 96
LCD display 104 cable length 30, 32
messages 152 category 137
LDAT-Series linear thrusters 22 feedback connector
linear actuators pinouts 64
interconnect diagram wiring 88, 96
LDAT 209 ground termination 89
MPAR/MPAI 211 induction 92
MPAS 210 interconnect diagram
link MPL/MPM/MPF/MPS 208
VPL/VPF/VPS 207
link/activity status indicator 159 overheating 161
speed status indicator 159 power connector
load category 138 pinouts 63
load observer 147 wiring 86, 92
Logix Designer application 110 shield clamp wiring 89, 94, 98
Logix5000 communication 217 testing 145
low voltage directive 277 tuning 145
velocity 161
mounting your capacitor module
M mounting order 48
mounting your drive
mains input power connector attaching to the panel 58
pinouts 61 drilling hole patterns 51
wiring 83 mounting order 48
major fault 162 shared-bus connection system 49
master feedback 126 single-axis 50
menu screens 105 zero-stack tab and cutout 48
MF connector MP connector
pinouts 64 pinouts 63
wiring 88, 96 wiring 86, 92
minor fault 162 MPAI electric cylinders 22
module definition 113, 116, 118 MPAR electric cylinders 22
MPAS linear stages 22
multiple skip speed 246

Index
N S
navigation buttons 104 SAB 92
network safe torque-off 176
parameters 108 bypass wiring 177
status indicator 159 cascaded wiring 178
new tag configurations
data type 121 hardwired 26
noise integrated 27, 28
abnormal 161 operation 173, 181
feedback 161 PFH 175, 183
reduction 43 pinouts 175
specifications 69, 178, 199
troubleshooting
O hardwired 174
integrated 182
open-loop frequency control 236 safety
out-of-box state 184 products catalog 14, 178
tab 119
scaling category 138
P sensorless vector 131, 239
panel requirements 32 setup screens 106
parameter list category 130, 132, 135, 139 shared AC
PFH definition 175, 183 configurations 226
pinouts interconnect diagram 204
24V input power connector 61 shared AC/DC
DC bus connector 61 configurations 228
digital inputs connector 62 interconnect diagram 204
Ethernet connector 63 power sharing example 232
mains input power connector 61 shared AC/DC hybrid
motor brake connector 63 configurations 229
motor feedback connector 64 interconnect diagram 205
motor power connector 63 power sharing example 231
safe torque-off 175 shared DC
shunt connector 61 configurations 226
planning your installation 31 interconnect diagram 205
PM motor closed-loop axis properties 136 power sharing example 230
power dissipation 37 shared-bus
power tab configurations 225
bus configuration 124 connection system 49
bus regulator 124 catalog numbers 29
bus-sharing guidelines 225
group 124 shield clamp 89, 94, 98
group example 142 shunt connector
groups 141 pinouts 61
power structure 123 wiring 101
power up 140 shunt resistor
publications, related 13 interconnect diagram 206
shutdown 162
sizing
R control power 232
regenerative energy 234 energy calculations 234
related publications 13 power sharing examples
shared AC/DC 232
remove grounding screws 77 shared AC/DC hybrid 231
remove/replace drive shared DC 230
remove drive 169 shared-bus configurations 225
remove power 168 shared AC 226
replace drive 169 shared AC/DC 228
startup and configure 170 shared AC/DC hybrid 229
routing power and signal wiring 72 shared DC 226
shared-bus guidelines 225
skip speed 245

Index
SLAT 257 troubleshooting

attributes 259 alarm 162
configuring 260 capacitor module status 160
soft menu ControlFLASH 222
home screen 104 controller/drive fault behavior 162
software fault
Logix Designer application 110 code summary 153
specifications codes 152
status only 162
brake relay 66 general system problems 160
control power input 67 abnormal noise 161
digital inputs 64 axis unstable 160
EtherNet/IP connections 66 erratic operation 161
motor feedback feedback noise 161
absolute position 68 motor accel/decel 160
Stegmann DSL 68 motor overheating 161
safe torque-off 69, 178, 199 motor velocity 161
speed limited adjustable torque 257 no rotation 161
stability control 243 ignore 162
startup sequence 107 LCD display messages 152
status indicators link speed status indicator 159
capacitor module 160 link/activity status indicator 159
link speed status 159 major fault 162
link/activity status 159 minor fault 162
module status 159 module status indicator 159
network status 159 network status indicator 159
STO safe torque-off
hardwired 174
bypass 193 integrated 182
connector pinouts 175 safety precautions 151
connector wiring 176 shutdown 162
state reset 181 status indicators 159
stop stop
drive 162 drive 162
planner 162 planner 162
system tuning
block diagrams induction motor 149
capacitor module 213 PM motor 147
power 212 tuning axes
components 15 load observer 147
ground 78 typical installation
mounting requirements 32
overview EtherNet/IP 23, 24, 25
EtherNet/IP 23, 24, 25 shared AC 18
shared AC 18 shared AC/DC 19
shared AC/DC 19 shared AC/DC hybrid 21
shared AC/DC hybrid 21 shared DC 20
shared DC 20 standalone 17
standalone 17
U
T ungrounded power configuration 75
testing axes user responsibilities 180
hookup test 145
time synchronization 114
torque proving 263 V
attributes 263 velocity droop 267
configuring 265 attribute 267
training 13 configure 268
transformer sizing 33 verify upgrade 223

Index
W
wiring
BC connector 87, 92
capacitor module 100
converter kit shield clamp 98
CP connector 82
earth ground 78
Ethernet cables 102
external shunt resistor 101
grounded power configuration 73
grounding screws 76
guidelines 81
input power type 73
IOD connector 85
IPD connector 83
MF connector 88, 96
motor cable shield clamp 89, 94
MP connector 86, 92
RC connector 101
remove grounding screws 77
requirements 72, 80
routing power and signal wiring 72
safe torque-off bypass 177
safe torque-off cascaded 178
STO connector 176
ungrounded power configuration 75
Z
zero-stack tab and cutout 48

Index
Notes:

.
Rockwell Automation Support

Use the following resources to access support information.
Knowledgebase Articles, How-to Videos, FAQs, Chat,

Technical Support Center https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/
User Forums, and Product Notification Updates.
Local Technical Support Phone Locate the phone number for your country. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/get-support-now.page
Numbers
Find the Direct Dial Code for your product. Use the code
Direct Dial Codes to route your call directly to a technical support http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/direct-dial.page
engineer.
Installation Instructions, Manuals, Brochures, and
Literature Library http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page
Technical Data.
Product Compatibility and Get help determining how products interact, check
Download Center (PCDC) features and capabilities, and find associated firmware. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/pcdc.page
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this
document, complete the How Are We Doing? form at
http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/du/ra-du002_-en-e.pdf.
Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.
Allen-Bradley, CompactLogix, ControlFLASH, ControlLogix, GuardLogix, HPK-Series, Kinetix, Logix5000, MP-Series, PanelView, POINT I/O, RRD-Series, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, RSLinx, Stratix 5700, Studio 5000,
Studio 5000 Logix Designer, and TL-Series, are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
EtherNet/IP and CIP Sync are trademarks of ODVA, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400
Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

Supersedes Publication 2198-UM001F-EN-P - December 2015 Copyright © 2016 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

Kinec Servo Drive

Uploaded by

Kinec Servo Drive

Uploaded by

User Manual

Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives

Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 3

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

Wire the Digital Inputs Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 5

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

Troubleshoot the Safe Torque-off Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 7

Kinetix 5500 System Current Demand Example . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 9

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

This manual contains new and updated information as indicated in the

Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 11

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

This manual provides detailed installation instructions for mounting, wiring,

This manual is intended for engineers or technicians directly involved in the

Kinetix 5500 Drive Cat. No. Description

Table 1 - Additional Resources

Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 13

Table 1 - Additional Resources (continued)

You can view or download publications at

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 15

Table 2 - Kinetix 5500 Drive System Overview (continued)

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

Figure 1 - Typical Kinetix 5500 Standalone Installation

and Motor Brake Power

Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 17

In this example, three-phase AC power and 24V control power is shared in a

Figure 2 - Typical Shared AC Installations

Shared AC (mains AC input)

Shared 24V (control power input)

and Motor Brake Power

AC Input Power (2198-H008-ERS drives shown)

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

Shared AC/DC Configurations

Figure 3 - Typical Shared AC/DC Installations

Shared AC (mains AC input)

24V DC Control, Digital Inputs, 1606-XL

and Motor Brake Power

Kinetix 5500 Servo Drives (front view)

Digital Inputs 2097-Rx

Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 19

Shared DC Common-bus Configurations

In this multi-axis example, the common-bus leader (sourcing) drive receives

Figure 4 - Typical Shared DC Common-bus Installations

Line Bonded Cabinet

Shared DC (DC common bus)

and Motor Brake Power

Kinetix 5500 Servo Drive System (front view)

Digital Inputs 2097-Rx

IMPORTANT In shared DC common-bus configurations, the leader drive power rating

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

Shared AC/DC Hybrid Configuration

In this multi-axis example, three-phase AC input power is supplied to two

Figure 5 - Typical Shared AC/DC Bus Hybrid Installations

Line Bonded Cabinet

and Motor Brake Power

Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 21

Figure 6 - Feedback Configuration Examples

2-pin Motor Feedback

Kinetix VP Rotary Motors

MP-Series Rotary Motors

MP-Series Linear Actuators

Induction Rotary Motors MP-Series Linear Actuators

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016

Refer to CompactLogix Controllers Specifications Technical Data, publication

Figure 7 - Kinetix 5500 Linear Communication Installation

CompactLogix Controller Programming Network

CompactLogix 5370 Controller Logix Designer

Rockwell Automation Publication 2198-UM001G-EN-P - March 2016 23

Figure 8 - Kinetix 5500 Ring Communication Installation

CompactLogix Controller Programming Network